Dell™ 2355dn Laser MFP
User’s Guide
DellTM 2355dn Laser MFP User’s Guide
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your
printer. For information on other documentation included with your printer, see "Finding
Information".
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
1
Double-click the Dell 2355dn Laser MFP Toner Reorder icon on your desktop.
OR
2
Visit Dell's website, or order Dell printer supplies by phone.
http://www.dell.com/supplies
Contacting Dell
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your
purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability
varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact
Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues:
1
Visit www.support.dell.com.
2
Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the
bottom of the page.
3
Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.
4
Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5
Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.
1
Notes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how
to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension,
OptiPlex,
Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell OpenManage and the YOURS IS HERE
logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel
Corporation in the U.S. and other countries; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, MS-DOS
, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities
claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in
trademarks and trade names other than its own.
____________________
2
Finding Information
What Are You Looking For?
• Drivers for my printer
• My User’s Guide
Find It Here
Software and Documentation CD
You can use the Software and Documentation CD to install,
uninstall, or reinstall drivers and utilities or access your User’s Guide.
For details, see "Software Overview".
Readme files may be included on your Software and Documentation
CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your
printer or advanced technical reference material for experienced
users or technicians.
• How to use my printer
Quick Reference Guide
Dell 2355dn MFP Quick Reference Guide
Front
Operator Panel
Operator Panel
3
4
13
5
11
Front
12
7
14
6
8
9
1
10
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express šervice code
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
15
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express šervice code
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express šervice code
Back
11
Back
Back
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Operator Panel
2
1
Front
Front
1
10
7
9
2
4
8
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express šervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
12
3
5
6
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express šervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express šervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
Touch Screen
Touch Screen
Touch Screen
1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in your
Product Information Guide prior to setting up and operating your
printer.
NOTE: Quick Reference Gudie may not be provided with your
product depending on your country.
• How to set up my printer Setup diagram
• Safety information
• Warranty information
• Regulatory Notice
Product Information Guide
3
What Are You Looking For?
Express Service Code
Find It Here
Express Service Code
Identify your printer when you use support.dell.com or contact
technical support.
Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting
technical support. The Express Service Code is not available in all
countries.
• Latest drivers for my printer
• Answers to technical service
and support questions
• Documentation for my
printer
Dell Support Website: support.dell.com
The Dell Support Website provides several online tools, including:
• Solutions - Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from
technicians, and online courses
• Upgrades - Upgrade information for components, such as memory
• Customer Care - Contact information, order status, warranty, and
repair information
• Downloads - Drivers
• Reference - Printer documentation and product specifications
You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region
on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the
requested details to access help tools and information.
4
Contents
DellTM 2355dn Laser MFP User’s Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Finding Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Unpacking Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
About Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operator Panel Button Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Common Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fax Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Understanding the Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Introducing the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Understanding the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Internal Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Printing the PCL Font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Printing the PS3 Font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Setting up the hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installing the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Making Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Powering On the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Setting fax setup sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Printing the Printer setting and Op-panel Menu setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5
Printing the Printer setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Printing the Op-panel Menu setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setting the Machine ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting Country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting the Sound/Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Setting Daylight Savings Time (Only for USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Scanner Lamp Power Save Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing the Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setting the Time Out Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setting the Job Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting the Toner Save Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting the Timing of Toner Low Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Ignoring Blank Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ignoring the Toner Low Message (Only for Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
50
50
50
51
55
55
55
55
55
Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Installing Dell Software for Local Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Installing Dell Software for Network Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6
Uninstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using the Dell Toner Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Printer Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Printer Settings Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
The Directory Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
The Fax Setting Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Setting Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Layout Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Paper Option Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Graphic Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Emulation Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
The Network(IPv4) Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Firmware Update Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Set IP Address Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Paper Handling
Print Media Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Card Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Storing Print Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Selecting an Output Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Printing to the Output Tray (Face down) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Printing to the Rear Door (Face up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Setting the Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setting the Paper Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7
Setting the Paper Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Setting the Paper Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting the Tray linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Substitute Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Default Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the paper feeding flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the paper auto feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
94
94
95
95
Tray Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tray Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Substitute Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
96
97
97
97
Printing
Printing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Printer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Basic Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphic Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Presets Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
105
107
110
111
112
112
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Change Percentage of Your Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Printing Posters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Printing Booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Printing on Both Sides of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Using Watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Using an Existing Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Creating a Watermark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8
Editing a Watermark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Deleting a Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using Overlays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
What is an Overlay? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Creating a New Page Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Using a Page Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Deleting a Page Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Copying
Loading Paper for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Selecting the Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Preparing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Loading an Original Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Making Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Setting Copy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Enlarge/Reduce Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Original Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Original Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Using Special Copy Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ECO Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Book Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Collate Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Auto Fit Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Clone Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Poster Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ID Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Printing Copies on Both Sides of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Changing the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Scanning
Scanning Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9
SmarThru Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Starting SmarThru Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Using SmarThru Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Scanning Using Dell Scan Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
About Dell Scan Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Setting scan information in Dell Scan Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Scanning to a PC Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Scanning and Sending an Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Scanning and Sending to SMB Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Scanning and Sending to FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Scanning and Sending Custom Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Scan to Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Scanning to the USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plugging in a USB memory key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning Using the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Scan Feature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
155
156
157
Managing the USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Deleting an Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting the USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing from the USB Memory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the USB Memory Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
158
159
159
Scan to Email Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Setting up the Email Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Scanning by a network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Preparing for network scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Setting up Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Registering local email numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding an E-mail Address to Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Editing or Deleting an E-mail Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Group Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuring group email numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Assigning Email Addresses to a Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10
Deleting a Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Editing Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Printing Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Changing Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Networking
About Sharing the Printer on a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Locally-shared Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Wired Network-connected Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Printing Across a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Setting Up the Locally Shared Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
In Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/ 7/ Server 2008 R2. . . . 172
Setting Up a Network-connected Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1 Via Network Administration Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2 Via the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Faxing
Setting the Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Setting the Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Setting Daylight Savings Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Changing the Clock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Setting Sounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Speaker, Ringer, Dial Tone, Fault, Conflict, and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Toll Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting up the Fax System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Changing the Fax Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Available Fax Defaults Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Testing Fax line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Sending a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Adjusting the Document Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Adjusting the Document Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Sending a Fax Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
11
Sending a Fax Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a Fax Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirming Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redialing fax number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
190
191
191
192
192
Receiving a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
About Receiving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Automatically in the Fax Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Manually in the Tel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Automatically in the Ans/Fax Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Manually Using an Extension Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Faxes in the Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
193
193
193
193
193
194
195
Automatic Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for a Number in the Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a Phonebook List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
197
200
201
Other Ways to Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Sending a Delayed Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a Priority Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Documents to a Scheduled Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canceling a Scheduled Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Forward to E-mail addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201
202
203
203
204
Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Using the Secure Receiving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Using Advanced Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fax Data Back-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12
Macintosh
Installing Software for Macintosh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Install the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
UnInstall the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Install the Scan driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
UnInstall the scan driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Setting Up the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
For a Network-connected Macintosh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
For a USB-connected Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Printing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Changing Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Duplex Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Linux
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Installing the MFP Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Installing the MFP Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Uninstalling the MFP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Using the Unified Driver Configurator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Printers Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Scanners Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MFP Ports Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Configuring Printer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Printing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Printing from Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Printing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Scanning a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Using the Image Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
13
Maintenance
Clearing the printer NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Backing up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Backing up Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Cleaning Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cleaning the Exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cleaning the Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cleaning the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Storing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redistributing Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252
252
254
256
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams in the DADF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Paper Feed Jam (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Feed Jam (optional tray 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPF Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser Area Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Exit Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
266
268
268
269
273
275
Clearing LCD Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Paper Feeding Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Printing Quality Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
14
Fax Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Copying Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Scanning Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Global address problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Common Windows Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Common Linux Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Common Macintosh Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Troubleshooting PostScript (PS) Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Installing Accessories
Precautions When Installing Printer Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Installing Printer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Installing an Optional Tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Installing Wireless Network interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Specifications
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Scanner and Copier Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Printer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Facsimile Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Paper Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Guidelines for Using Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Paper Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Paper Output Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Printer and Paper Storage Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
15
16
Unpacking Your Printer
1
Select a location for your printer.
CAUTION: The printer requires at least two people to lift it safely.
•
Leave enough room to open the printer tray, covers, doors, and options. It is also
important to allow enough space around the printer for proper ventilation.
•
Provide the proper environment:
•
A firm, level surface.
•
Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
•
Away from sunlight, extreme humidity, or high fluctuations in temperature.
•
A clean, dry, and dust free lowcation.
•
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. See "Setting up the
hardware".
•
Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.
NOTE: Leave the printer in the box until you are ready to install it.
2
In addition to the Dell 2355dn Laser MFP, ensure that you have the following items in
the box. If there is a missing item, contact Dell:
Toner cartridge
Dell 2355dn MFP Quick Reference Guide
Front
Operator Panel
Telephone line corda
Setup diagram
Operator Panel
3
Front
4
13
5
11
Front
12
7
14
6
8
9
1
10
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express šervice code
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
15
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express šervice code
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express šervice code
Back
11
Back
Back
Software and Documentation CDb
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Operator Panel
2
1
Front
Power corda
1
10
7
9
2
4
8
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express šervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
12
3
5
6
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express šervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express šervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
Touch Screen
Touch Screen
Touch Screen
1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
Quick Reference Guidec
Product Information Guide
a
b
The appearance of the power cord and the telephone line cord may differ according to your country’s
specifications.
The Software and Documentation CD contains Dell printer drivers, Scan drivers, Printer Settings Utility, Set
IP, Macintosh driver, Linux driver, Dell Toner Management System, SmarThru Office and a User’s Guide.
17
c
Quick Reference Guide may not be provided with your product depending on your country.
NOTE: Use the telephone line cord supplied with your printer. If you choose to use a different cord,
use an AWG #26 or lower gauge cord that is not more than 250 cm (98 inches) in length.
NOTE: The power cord must be plugged into a grounded power socket.
18
3
Save the carton and packing material in case the printer needs to be repacked.
4
Remove the packing tape from the front, back, and sides of the printer.
5
Remove the label completely from the scanner module by gently pulling it. The scan
unlock switch should move forward to the unlock position as the label is pulled out.
NOTE: To confirm the scanner is unlocked, open the scanner cover and ensure that the blue
latch is in the unlocked ( ) position. If the latch is not in the unlocked position, reach under
the operator panel and pull it forward. If the scan switch is locked, you cannot copy or scan.
NOTE: When you are moving the printer or do not intend to use it for a long period of time,
move the switch BACKWARD to the lock position, as shown.
To scan or copy a document, the switch must be unlocked.
19
About Your Printer
These are the main components of your printer. The following illustrations show the standard
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP and an optional tray 2 attached:
Front View
DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder) cover
document width
document input tray
guides
operator panel (See
"Operator Panel
Button Functions".)
USB memory port
document glass
document output tray
paper output
extension
output tray (face down)
MPF (multi
purpose feeder)
tray 1
(250-sheet paper feeder)
optional tray 2
(250-sheet paper feeder)
20
toner cartridge
front cover
Rear View
USB port
rear door
(open for face
up output)
power switch
locking unit slotb
network port
optional tray 2
cable connector
power receptacle
optional tray 2 cable
telephone line
socket (Line)
control board cover
extension telephone socket (EXT)a
a If you want to connect the extension phone or
answering machine, see "Making Connections".
b You can purchase a cable lock that completely prevents
access to the control board cover.
21
Operator Panel Button Functions
Status LED
Fax keys
Function keys Common keys
Common Keys
Press:
To:
Stop an operation at any time, or return to main menu.
Reverts the current setting to the default values.
Start a job.
Function Keys
Press:
To:
Deletes characters in the edit area.
Job status shows the jobs currently running and in queue.
You can copy both sides of an ID Card, such as a driver’s license, to a single side of
paper.
Gives detailed information about machine’s info., reports, troubleshooting guide,
and quick reference guide.
Fax Keys
Press:
To:
Dial/Enter number.
22
Understanding the Status LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's condition by the light
color of it's action.
Status
Description
Off
• The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received, or any button
is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.
Green
Orange
Blinking
The machine is warming up or ready to receive the data.
On
The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be
cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the
machine resumes.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner cartridge. You can
temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and
install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display
message.
23
Introducing the Home Screen
Touchscreen
The home screen on the control panel allows user-friendly operation of the machine. Once you
press the home icon (
) on the screen, it shows the home screen.
•
Copy: Enters the copy menu.
•
Scan: Enters the scan menu.
•
Fax: Enters the fax menu.
•
Setup: You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.
•
Shortcuts 1, 2, 3: You can set the option which is frequently used on home screen. Also
you can change shortcut name as well. See "Using Shortcut Menu".
•
•
USB: Enters the USB menu when USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on
your machine.
•
Language: Changes the display language on the display screen.
•
LCD Brightness: Adjusts brightness of the display screen.
•
•
•
24
: Enters the LCD Brightness, USB, and Language.
: Shows the toner status.
: Start a job.
: Scroll through available options.
Understanding the Keyboard
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, diacritical marks, or special symbols using the
keyboard on the home screen. This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for
better usability to the user.
Touch the input area where you need to enter alphabet characters, numbers, diacritical marks,
or special symbols and the keyboard pops up on the screen.
•
: Return to the upper menu.
•
: Deletes all characters in the input area.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
: Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.
: Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor.
: Saves and closes input result.
: Enters a blank between characters. Also, you can insert a pause in the fax number.
A “,” appears on the display.
: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa.
: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the numbers or special symbols
keyboard.
: Switches diacritical characters.
25
Using Shortcut Menu
You can set the option which is frequently used on home screen.
Creating Shortcut Menu
1
Press Shortcut (
2
Press the left/right arrows to select the you want shortcut.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select the feature you want.
4
If you want to change shortcut name, press
when the confirmation window
appears and enter the new name using the keyboard. Otherwise, press
.
) from the home screen.
Setting the Default Settings
The default settings are used unless they are changed by using the operator panel.
To create your own default settings:
26
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next ( ) button.
3
Press Default Setting.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select Shortcut Default.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the you want shortcut.
6
Press the left/right arrows to select the feature you want.
7
If you want to change shortcut name, press
when the confirmation window
appears and enter the new name using the keyboard. Otherwise, press
.
Internal Fonts
The Dell 2355dn Laser MFP Laser printer supports the PCL and PS fonts.
If you want to see the PCL and PS font list, follow these steps:
Printing the PCL Font list
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Reports.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select PCL Font List.
5
PCL Font list pages print out.
) button.
Printing the PS3 Font list
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Report.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select PS Font List.
5
PS Font list pages print out.
) button.
NOTE: You can add additional PCL fonts and PS fonts in Printer Settings Utility. See "Printer Settings
Utility".
Setting up the hardware
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Placemat. Make
sure you read the Placemat and complete the following steps:
1
Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to
open covers and trays.
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold,
and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.
27
100 mm
(3.9 inches)
200 mm
(7.8 inches)
485 mm (19 inches)
200 mm
(7.8 inches)
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm
(0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected.
2
Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3
Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.
4
Install the print cartridge.
5
Load paper. See "Loading Paper".
6
Make sure that all the cables are connected to the printer.
7
Turn the printer on.
NOTE: When you move the printer, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the printer
may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the printer or result in bad printing quality.
28
Installing the Toner Cartridge
1
Open the front cover.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for more than a few
minutes.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the
cartridge to avoid touching this area.
2
Remove the toner cartridge from its bag and thoroughly shake the cartridge from
side-to-side to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
NOTE: If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wipe the toner off with a dry cloth and
wash your clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3
Holding the toner cartridge by the handle, slide it into the printer until it locks firmly
into place.
29
4
30
Close the front cover.
Loading Paper
Load up to 250 sheets of plain paper (75 g/m2, 20lb) in the paper tray.
NOTE: Set the paper type and size after loading paper into the paper tray. See "Setting the Paper
Type" and "Setting the Paper Size" for the paper used in copying and faxing, or "Paper Tab" for
computer printing.
Load the paper:
1
Pull the paper tray out of the printer.
2
If you load paper that is longer than a standard (Letter or A4) size, such as Legal paper,
press and unlatch the guide lock, and then slide the paper length guide out completely to
extend the paper tray to its full length.
31
3
Slide in the paper length guide until it rests against the end of the paper stack.
For paper smaller than Letter size, adjust the rear paper length guide so that it lightly
touches the paper stack.
4
32
Pinch the paper width guide, and move it towards the stack of paper until it touches the
side of the stack.
5
Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them out. Do not fold or
crease the print media. Align the edges on a level surface.
6
Insert the paper stack into the paper tray with the side to be printed on facing down.
7
Do not exceed the maximum stack height indicated by the paper limit marks on both the
inside walls of the tray.
NOTE: Overloading the paper tray may cause paper jams.
NOTE: Improper adjustment of paper guides can result in paper jams.
8
Slide the paper tray back into the printer.
33
9
Set the paper type and size. For more information, see "Setting the Paper Type" and
"Setting the Paper Size".
Making Connections
Connecting the Telephone Line
RJ11 telephone line
socket (Line)
To the wall jack
1
Plug one end of a telephone line cord into the RJ11 telephone line socket (FAX) and the
other end into an active wall jack.
To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, remove the plug from
the extension telephone socket (EXT) ( ) and plug the telephone or answering
machine into the extension telephone socket (EXT).
34
2
Alternative setup of Fax connected to a wall socket and a external phone or Telephone
answering device (TAD):
If connecting a FAX using an answering machine or telephone answering device (TAD):
Computer
Telephone Answering Device
NOTE: Set rings to answer to digit greater than the "Ring to Answer" setting for the telephone
answering device (TAD).
If connecting a FAX using a computer modem:
35
Telephone Answering Device
NOTE: Set rings to answer to digit greater than the "Ring to Answer" setting for the telephone
answering device (TAD).
NOTE: For additional information, see "Using an Answering machine" or "Using a Computer
Modem".
NOTE: Phone adaptor not supplied for the United Kingdom. You are advised to buy from local
suppliers.
36
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark,
Austria, Belgium, Italy, France, and Switzerland), connect the telephone or answering machine
as shown in the following figure.
Connecting the Printer Cable
Connecting the printer Locally
Local printer refers to a printer connected to your computer using a USB cable. If your printer
is attached to a network instead of your computer, skip this step and go on to "Connecting the
printer to the Network".
NOTE: USB cables are sold separately. Contact Dell to purchase a USB cable.
NOTE: Connecting the printer to the USB port of the computer requires a certified USB cable. You
will need to buy a USB 2.0-compliant cable that is about 3 m in length.
1
Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are powered off and
unplugged.
2
Connect a USB cable to the USB port on your printer.
37
3
Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on the computer, not the
USB keyboard.
Connecting the printer to the Network
1
Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are powered off and
unplugged.
2
Connect one end of a standard category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) network cable
to a LAN drop or hub, and the other end to the Ethernet network port on the back of the
printer. The printer automatically adjusts for the network speed.
NOTE: After connecting the printer, you need to configure the network parameters on the operator
panel. See "Printing a Network Configuration Page".
38
Powering On the Printer
CAUTION: The fusing area at the rear part of the inside of your printer becomes hot once the
printer is powered on.
CAUTION: Be careful not to be burned when you access this area.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the printer when it is powered on. If you do, it may give you an
electric shock.
To power on the printer:
1
Plug one end of the power cord into the power receptacle at the back of the printer and
the other end into a properly grounded outlet.
2
Press the power switch to turn on the printer. The home screen appears on the display
indicating that the printer is now on.
NOTE: If you power on the printer for the first time, you have to set the language, date, time,
country and fax setup sequence. These settings may be needed also after the firmware upgrade or
after the printer is reset.
Setting fax setup sequence
1
Set the language. See "Changing the Display Language".
2
Select the country. See "Selecting Country".
3
Set the date and time. See "Setting the Time and Date".
4
When fax setup confirmation window appears, select
or
.
If you selected
, your printer restores the fax settings as default.
If you selected
:
a
Your printer prints out a Fax Setup Help Report.
b
Enter the machine ID. See "Setting the Printer ID".
c
Select the receive mode and ring to answer. See "Setting up the Fax System".
39
d
5
Test the fax line. See "Testing Fax line connection".
Your printer returns to the Standby mode.
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP Menu Functions
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine's
functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing touching them on the display screen.
NOTE: Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or setup.
Refer to the following table:
Copy
Manual Copy
Scan
Local PC
Fax
Manual Send
ECO Copy
Network PC
Speed Dial Send
Book Copy
Send Email
Group Dial Send
Collate Copy
SMB
Delayed Send
Auto Fit Copy
FTP
Priority Send
Clone Copy
Custom Email
Auto Send
Poster Copy
Fax Server
On Hook Dial
ID Copy
USB
Redial
N -Up Copy
Setup
Job Status
Machine Setup
Default Setting
Paper Setup
Tray Behavior
Email/Fax List
Reports
Fax Setup
Email Setup
Network Setup
Initial Setup
Restore Options
Maintenance
Job Management
Clear Drum
Fax Line Test
Troubleshooting
Language
40
Printing the Printer setting and Op-panel Menu setting
NOTE: This will be helpful for the users to maneuver through the op-panel setting and tree in
changing the defaults.
Printing the Printer setting
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Reports.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Printer Settings.
) button.
The Printer Settings page prints out.
Printing the Op-panel Menu setting
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Reports.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Op-panel Menu Tree.
) button.
The Op-panel menu page prints out.
Setting the Machine ID
You can set the machine ID and fax number which will be printed at the top of each page. If
you have installed the fax multi-line kit, you need to select a line first, follow these steps:
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Machine ID.
5
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
Enter Fax and ID using the keyboard on the display. See "Understanding the Keyboard" for
more information about using the keyboard.
6
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
41
Changing the Display Language
To change the displayed language that the operator panel displays, follow these steps:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to Language.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the language you want.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Selecting Country
To change the country that appears on the operator panel, follow these steps:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Select Country.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select the country you want.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Power Save Mode
The Power Save mode enables your printer to reduce power consumption when it is not in
actual use. You can enable this mode by selecting the duration for which the printer waits after
a job is printed before it switches to a reduced power state.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Print Power Save.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the time settings you want.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
NOTE: Available setting range is from 5 min. to 120 min. (factory default : 30 min.) and you can also
access this mode from the EWS (Printer Settings
Print Power Save).
42
Print Settings
Setup Menu and select
Setting the Time and Date
The time and date are printed on all faxes.
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.
To set the time and date:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Date & Time.
5
Enter the date and time each using the up/down arrows.
) button.
Day= 01 ~ 31
Month= 01 ~ 12
Year= 2000 ~ 2099
Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
Minute= 00 ~ 59
6
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Clock Mode
To set the clock mode:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Clock Mode.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the appropriate option you want.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
43
Setting the Sound/Volume
You can set the volume for button sounds, notice alarms, and the sound that occurs during a
fax job.
1
Press Setup
1
Press the Next (
2
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Sound & Volume.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the appropriate option you want.
5
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
•
Speaker: Turns On or Off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker,
such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to Comm. the speaker is on
until the remote machine answers.
•
Ringer: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select Off, Low,
Med, and High.
•
Dial Tone: Adjusts the dial tone volume. For the dial tone volume, you can select
1-7.
•
Fault: Adjusts the ‘error occurs’ volume. For the error volume, you can select Off,
Low, Med, and High.
•
Conflict: Adjusts the conflict volume. For the error volume, you can select Off, Low,
Med, and High.
•
Selection: You can set the selection volume for when pressing the button; you can
select Off, Low, Med, and High.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting Daylight Savings Time (Only for USA)
If your country switches to Daylight Savings Time each year, use this procedure to
automatically switch to Daylight Savings Time and to Standard time.
44
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Day Light Saving.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select Manual.
6
Enter the Start Date and End Date each using the up/down arrows.
7
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Scanner Lamp Power Save Mode
The scan lamp under the document glass automatically turns off when it is not in actual use
after a preset period to reduce power consumption and extend the lamp life. The lamp
automatically turns on and the warm-up cycle begins whenever any key is pressed or the DADF
cover is opened or a document is detected in the DADF.
You can set the duration for which the scan lamp waits after a scan job is completed before it
switches to the Power Save mode.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Scan Power Save.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the timeout value you want.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Changing the Default Mode
You can set the default values for copy, fax, scan, and home window.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Default Mode.
5
Press the left/right arrows to the function you want to change, and change its settings.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Time Out Option
You can set the time the printer waits before it restores the default copy or fax settings if you
do not start copying or faxing after changing the settings on the operator panel.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
1
Press the Next (
2
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Timeout.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the timeout value you want.
5
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
45
Setting the Job Management
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select the job management and press Job Management.
4
Set each option as you want.
5
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
•
Stored Jobs: Print jobs currently stored in the RAM disk.
•
Job Expiration: Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer
before it is deleted.
•
Clear Stored Job: You can delete jobs currently stored in the RAM disk. If you select
the ALL, all Secure Job and Stored Print are deleted.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Toner Save Mode
Toner save mode allows your machine to use less toner on each page. Activating this mode
extends the life of the toner cartridge beyond what one would experience in the normal mode,
but it reduces print quality.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Toner Save.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select On.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Timing of Toner Low Alert
You can customize the level to alert toner low or toner empty. If the current toner amount
drops below the setting level, the printer will display a warning message on the operator panel.
46
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Toner Status Alert.
5
Press the option you want.
6
Press the left/right arrows to select the option in Warning Level and Alert On Panel.
7
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Ignoring Blank Pages
The printer detects the printing data from computer whether a page is empty or includes any
data. To skip the blank pages at printing document, follow these steps:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Print Blank Pages.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select Off.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Ignoring the Toner Low Message (Only for Fax)
When the toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life, the printer shows the
toner empty message and continues printing except incoming faxes. In this case, incoming
faxes are saved in memory. However, you can set the machine to print incoming faxes, even
though print quality is not optimal.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Allow Toner Low.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select Off.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
47
Software Overview
After setting up your printer and connecting it to your computer, you must install the drivers
and utilities from the "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD
included with your printer. If you purchased a DellTM computer and your printer at the same
time, the drivers and utilities are automatically installed. You don’t need to install them. The
"Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD contains the following:
•
Dell Printer PCL driver- allows your computer to communicate with your printer. To use
your printer as a printer in Windows, you must install the printer driver(s). For
information about installing the printer drivers in Windows, see "Installing Software in
Microsoft® Windows® Operating System".
•
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool- enables you to monitor the status of your network
printer without leaving your desk.
•
Printer Settings Utility- allows you to set up fax phonebook and the printer's other
options from your computer desktop.
•
Dell Toner Management System- displays the status of the printer and the name of the
job when you send a job to print. The Dell Toner Management System window also
displays the level of toner remaining and allows you to order replacement toner
cartridges.
•
SmarThru Office- this program is the accompanying software for your machine. You can
use this program to scan images or documents. This feature can be used via the local
connection or the network connection.
•
Scan Driver- TWAIN or Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for
scanning documents on your printer.
•
User’s Guide- PDF documentation provides detailed information about using your
printer.
•
Set IP- Use this program to set your printer's TCP/IP addresses.
•
PS driver- PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. You can use the PostScript driver to
print documents.
•
Dell Scan Manager- enables you to scan a document on your printer and save it to a
network-connected computer.
•
Linux driver- enables you to print and scan in a Linux environment.
•
Macintosh printer driver- enables you to use your printer with a Macintosh computer.
•
Firmware Update Utility- use this program to update your machine’s firmware. See
"Minimum Requirements".
•
Status Monitor- This program allows you to monitor the printer’s status and alerts you
when an error occurs during printing.
•
LDAP- enables you to store e-mail addresses in the (LDAP) server. Also, supports a method
of securing LDAP communication via SSL. In the Embedded Web Service, you can set the
LDAP server attributes.
48
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, also known as the printer Embedded Web Service,
lets you monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk. You can also
view and/or change the printer configuration settings, monitor the toner level, and order
replacement toner cartridges by clicking on the Dell supplies link right from your Web
browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is only available when the multi-function printer is
connected to a (or the) network. See page "Minimum Requirements".
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, just type your network printer's IP
address in your Web browser.
If you do not know what your printer's IP address is, print a network configuration page, which
lists the IP address:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrow to select Reports.
4
Press the up/down arrow to select Network Settings.
) button.
If an IP address has not been assigned, assign one for your printer. See "Minimum
Requirements".
49
Printer Status
Get immediate feedback on printer supply status. When the toner is running low, click the
toner supplies link on the first screen to order additional toner cartridges.
Printer Settings
Change the printer settings, view the printer settings status, and update the print server
firmware.
NOTE: Configuration Menu blocks the user from altering the operator panel setting unless the
correct password is entered.
Printer Server Settings
This menu supports configuration of the following items:
•
Basic Information about the administrator
•
TCP/IP
•
SNMP Traps
•
SNMP Community
•
SNMPv3
•
SLP
•
UPnP (SSDP)
•
IPP
•
Telnet
•
EtherTalk
•
Secure Access
•
802.1x
•
WSD
Fax Settings
Configure fax settings such as fax cover, receive mode, phone book, and fax server settings.
Fax server setting is needed for sending fax using a fax server.
For information about configuring fax server parameters, contact the fax server administrator.
50
Available Options for FAX Server
Option
Fax Server
Menu
Description
Fax Server
When you select Enable, you are able to carry out fax server
settings.
Default Scan
Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution.
Default
Attachment Type
Select the file format of an attachment.
Default [From:]
Address
Enter your email address.
Default [To:]
Address
Enter the recipient’s email address.
Customization
Field
You can customize the from, to, or subject field.
Prefix
Input characters which shall be added in front of the
customized field.
Suffix
Input characters which shall be appended at the end of the
customized field.
Email Settings
Receive an email when the printer needs supplies or intervention. Type your name or the key
operator’s name in the email list box to be notified.
Through this menu the following features can be programmed:
•
SMTP Server Setup
•
SMTP Client Setup
•
Email Alert Setup
•
LDAP Server Setup
The following information can be useful in setting up above-mentioned deliverable:
51
Available Options for Email Alert
Option
Email Alert
Setup
Setup POP3
before SMTP
Description
IP Address or Host Sets the IP address or Host name.
Name
Primary SMTP
Gateway
Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port
Number
Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be 25 or between
5000 and 65535.
Enable Primary
SMTP Auth
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
Primary SMTP
Account Name
Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@)
can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
Primary SMTP
Account Password
Specifies the SMTP account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Primary From
Sender’s e-mail address registered in the Primary server.
SMTP Timeout
Sets the timeout period from 30 to 120 seconds.
Reply Address
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail
Alert.
Secure Email
Connection with
SSL/TLS
Supports a method of securing SMTP communication via
SSL/TSL.
POP3 Server and
Porta
Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of
"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name up to 63 characters.
And specifies the POP3 server port number up to 15
alphanumeric characters.
POP3 User Namea Specifies the POP3 account user name.Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@)
can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
POP3 User
Passworda
52
Specifies the POP3 account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Option
Email Alert
Setup
Description
Email List 1
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature
up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Email List 2
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature
up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Select Alerts for
List 1
• Supply Alert: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert
for consumables.
• Paper Handling Alert: Select the check box to receive an
E-Mail Alert for paper handling.
Select Alerts for
List 2
• Supply Alert: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert
for consumables.
• Paper Handling Alert: Select the check box to receive an
E-Mail Alert for paper handling.
• Toner Low: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
toner low.
• Toner Almost Empty: Select the check box to receive an
E-Mail Alert for toner almost empty.
• Toner Empty: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert
for toner empty.
a. Available when SMTP requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication is selected.
53
Available Options for LDAP Server
Option
LDAP Server
Setup
LDAP Server and
Port
Description
Specifies the LDAP server address in IP address format of
"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name up to 63 characters.
And specifies the LDAP server port number up to 15
alphanumeric characters.
Secure LDAP
Connection
Supports a method of securing LDAP communication via SSL.
Search Root
Directory
Enters the top search level of the LDAP directory tree.
Authentication
method
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing LDAP server.
Append Root to
Base DN
Check if it is needed to append base DN at the end of the user
DN.
Login Name
Specifies the LDAP account user name.Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@)
can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
Password
Specifies the LDAP account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Maximum Number '0' means that the number of LDAP search results does not
of Search Results have a limit. It shall be 5 ~ 100 entries.
54
Search Timeout
Sets the timeout period from 5 to 100 seconds.
LDAP Referral
Check if it is necessary.
Search Name
Order
• Choose Common Name if user id has "cn=<user name>"
form.
• Choose Email Address if user id has "mail=<user name>"
form.
• Choose Surname Given Name otherwise.
Copy Printer Settings
Quickly clone the printer's settings to another printer or printers on the network just by typing
each printer's IP address.
NOTE: You must be a network administrator to use this feature.
Printing Statistics
Keep track of printing trends, such as paper usage and the types of jobs being printed.
Set Password
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool (Embedded Web Service) can be locked by setting
password. When any of the printer settings are changed using this tool, it will prompt for User
name and Password.
Locking Operator Panel or Administrator Menu (Setup):
This feature is enabled using Embedded Web Service and locks the user from altering the
operator panel or Administrator menu setting unless password is specified.
NOTE: You must be a network administrator to use this feature.
Wireless
Please refer to the Wireless Quick Reference Guide for more details on wireless module
settings with the printer.
NOTE: The Wireless menu appears only when you install the wireless network interface card to your
machine.
Online Help
Click Help to visit the Dell website for printer troubleshooting.
NOTE: For more information about the All-In-One Main page, View Saved Images page, or the
Maintain/Troubleshoot page, click the Help link located in the upper right corner of the screen.
55
Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating
System
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the "Minimum Requirements".
NOTE: For Microsoft Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003 Server® 2008,
Windows Vista®, Windows 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2, the system administrator should
install Dell software.
Supported Operating Systems
•
Windows 2000 Professional or Advanced Server
•
Windows XP Home edition or Professional
•
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2
•
Windows Vista
•
Windows 7
Minimum Requirements
56
•
Disk space: Windows 2000: 300 MB
Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: 1 GB
Windows 7: 16 GB
Windows Server 2008 R2: 10 GB
•
Memory: Windows 2000: 64 MB
Windows XP/Server 2003: 128 MB
Windows Vista/Server 2008: 512 MB
Windows 7: 1 GB
Windows Server 2008 R2: 512 MB (2048 MB)
•
CPU: Windows 2000: Pentium II 400 MHZ or higher
Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: Pentium III 933 MHZ or higher
Windows 7: Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher
Windows Server 2008 R2: Pentium IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2
GHz or faster)
•
Required software: Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher
Installing Dell Software for Local Printing
A local printer is a printer attached to your computer using a USB cable. If your printer is
attached to a network instead of your computer, skip this step and go on to "Installing Dell
Software for Network Printing".
A printer driver is a software that lets your computer communicate with your printer. The
procedure to install drivers depends on the operating system you are using.
NOTE: If you attach a USB printer cable while your printer and computer are powered on, the
Found New Hardware Wizard launches immediately. Cancel the screen and use the "Installing
Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD to install the Dell software.
1
Ensure that the printer is connected to your computer and powered on. All applications
should be closed on your computer before beginning installation.
NOTE: If the printer is not connected to your computer when you install the "Installing
Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD, the No Printer Found screen
appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to install the software.
2
Insert the "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD.
NOTE: For Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click Continue when the User Account
Control screen appears.
NOTE: If user has disabled auto continue, then please open setup.exe from CD root folder.
3
Select Personal Installation.
If necessary, select a language by pressing the Language button on the main screen.
57
4
Select Typical Installation to install the software and the User’s Guide.
If you select Custom Installation, select the components to be installed. You can also
change the destination folder. Click Next.
NOTE: If your printer is not connected to the computer, the following printer not founder windows
will appear.
58
5
When the installation is complete, you may print a test page. Click Finish to complete
the installation and close the wizard. You are now ready to print.
Network Installation
Assigning an IP Address
Before using the printer on the network, you must set an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
for the printer. If you want DHCP or BOOTP to automatically set the IP address, a DHCP or
BOOTP server must exist on the network.
If the network is using DHCP/BOOTP, an IP address is automatically assigned after
connecting the network cable to the printer. In case no DHCP or BOOTP the printer will
automatically assign a legacy IP address 192.0.0192 or local link address 169.254.xxx.xxx.
To configure the IP address manually, you can use the supplied "Installing Software in
Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD. Print the Configuration page of the printer to
see the current network configuration and MAC address. You will need this information to
configure the printer for the network.
1
Ensure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on. Close all programs.
2
Insert the "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD.
NOTE: For Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click Continue when the User Account
Control screen appears.
NOTE: If user has disabled auto continue, then please open setup.exe from CD root folder.
3
Select Set IP Address. The list of printers is available on the network displays.
59
4
Select the printer you want to assign an MAC address to. The printer’s MAC address can
be found on the Configuration page for the printer.
5
When you finish setting the IP address for the printer, exit the program.
Installing Dell Software for Network Printing
When you connect your printer to the network, you must first configure the TCP/IP settings
for the printer. After assigning and verifying the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to install the
Dell software on each network printer.
You can install the Dell software on the network computers locally or remotely.
NOTE: You need administrative access to install printer drivers on the network computers.
1
Ensure that the printer is connected to your network and powered on. All applications
should be closed on your computer before beginning installation. For details about
connecting on the network, see "Minimum Requirements".
2
Insert the "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD.
NOTE: For Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click Continue when the User Account
Control screen appears.
NOTE: If user has disabled auto continue, then please open setup.exe from CD root folder.
3
Select Network Installation.
If necessary, select a language by pressing the Language button on the main screen.
60
4
If you want to install the drivers on this computer for network operation, select Local
Installation, and then click Next.
If you want to install the Dell software on remote computers or network servers on the
same network, select Remote Installation. The domain administrator’s ID and password
are required. Select the client computer(s) in the same domain on a network and then
click Next.
NOTE: Both server computer and client computer should be one of the following OS:
Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008,Windows Vista,
Windows 7, and Server 2008 R2.
NOTE: The server computer should be able to resolve the client computer name into an IP
address.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer that you want to
install from the list and then click Next.
61
If you do not see your printer in the list, click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add
Printer to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the
port name and an existing IP address for the printer.
If you want to install the printer on a server, select the I am setting up this printer on a
server check box.
6
The screen displays the printer drivers installed on your computer.
You can change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on the network, and set the
printer as the default printer. Click Next.
62
7
Select Custom Installation. Click Next.
If you select Typical Installation, go to step 9.
8
Select the components to be installed, and you can also change the destination folder.
Click Next.
9
When the printer installation is complete, you may print a test page. Click Finish to
complete the installation and close the wizard. You are now ready to print.
63
NOTE: For information about installing the wireless network interface card and configuring the
network parameters, refer to Wireless Network Quick Install Guide.
64
Uninstalling Software
You should remove the printer drivers if you are upgrading the software or if your driver
installation fails. You can remove the software using the "Installing Software in Microsoft®
Windows® Operating System" CD or the Windows uninstall option.
NOTE: Close all programs before uninstalling software, and then restart your computer after
uninstalling the software.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs
Dell MFP Software Uninstall.
Dell Printers
2
Select the software you want to remove. Click Next.
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer.
3
After the software is removed, click Finish.
65
Using the Dell Toner Management System
The Printer Status Monitor displays the status of the printer that is connected to the local
network. Printer Ready, Printer Offline, Error-Check Printer, and the toner level or Toner Low
alerts will for your printer.
Printer Status Monitor
The Printer Status Monitor screen launches when you send a print job to the printer. This
only appears on the computer screen. Depending on the remaining toner level, the launched
Printer Status Monitor screen is different.
Shows the toner level for your printer.
Click to order replacement toner cartridges
online. See "Minimum Requirements".
NOTE: Help me on Printer Status Monitor window will show you the printer troubleshooting guide.
Click Help me to show animation details about the error condition.
Or
From the Start menu, select Programs
Printer Status Monitor.
66
Dell Printers
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
Printer Settings Utility
By using the Printer Settings Utility window, you can set up fax system data options, and
create and edit Phonebook entries from your computer.
When you install the software, the Printer Settings Utility is automatically installed.
For information about installing the software, see "Installing Software in Microsoft®
Windows® Operating System".
To open the Printer Settings Utility:
1
From the Start menu, select Programs
Printer Settings Utility.
Dell Printers
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
The Printer Settings Utility window opens.
2
The Printer Settings Utility window provides several features; Directory (Phonebook,
Address Book), Fax Setting, and Setting.
For further details, click the
button.
To use the default settings, click the Printer Default button.
To exit, click the Exit button at the bottom of the window.
67
The Directory Section
Click the Phonebook or Address Book section and the Setting button to create and edit
Phonebook or Emailbook entries.
Phonebook entries
Retrieve the Phonebook
entries from the printer
to the Printer Settings
Utility.
Allows you to edit a
selected Phonebook
entry.
Modify a selected
Phonebook entry.
68
Deletes a selected
Phonebook entry.
Downloads the
Phonebook entries from
the Printer Settings
Utility to the printer.
The Fax Setting Section
Click each item under Fax Setting to setup the fax configuration. The printer setup contains
the printer ID and printer fax number. You can select Printer Setup, Toll Save, and Default
Output Options.
.
Enter your printer ID.
Enter your fax number.
Click to send this cover page to the printer.
The Setting Section
Click the Setting section and select the power save from the drop-down list.
You can select Power Save, Toner Save, and Emulation Type.
The Layout Section
Click the Layout section and select the orientation from the drop-down list.
You can select Orientation, Duplex, and Duplex Margin.
The Paper Option Section
Click the Paper Option section and select the basic paper handling specifications from the
drop-down list.
You can select Copies, Paper Size, Paper Type, Paper Source, and Tray Linking.
The Graphic Section
Click the Graphic section and select the degree of darkness from the drop-down list.
You can select Darkness.
The Emulation Section
Click the Emulation section and select the emulation from the drop-down list. Also you can
add additional fonts.
69
You can select Emulation Setting.
If you want additional PCL fonts and PS fonts, select Store PCL Font and Macro in
Emulation Setting.
The Network(IPv4) Section
Click the Network(IPv4) section and select the network environment from the drop-down list.
You can select Configure Network and Print Network Configuration Page.
Firmware Update Utility
You can update your printer’s firmware using the Firmware Update Utility.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs
Firmware Update Utility.
Dell Printers
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
2
Download the latest firmware. Click http://support.dell.com.
3
If your printer is connected with an USB cable, click USB Connected Printer.
Or if your printer is connected with a network cable, click Network Connected Printer.
4
70
Click Browse and select the downloaded firmware file.
5
Click Update Firmware.
71
Set IP Address Utility
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is the hardware serial
number of the network printer card or interface. Especially, it is for the network administrator
to set several network IPs at the same time.
NOTE: You can only use Set IP Address when your printer is connected to a network.
1
Connect the network cable to your machine.
2
Print the Network Configuration page of the printer to see the current network
configuration and MAC address.
3
From the Start menu, select Programs
Set IP Address.
4
Click in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and
then click Apply
Dell Printers
NOTE: when you enter the MAC address, enter it without colon(:).
72
6
Click OK.
7
Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
Paper Handling
Print Media Guidelines
Storing Print Media
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications
Selecting an Output Location
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
Setting the Paper Size
Setting the Paper Type
Setting the Paper Tray
Tray Behavior
Print Media Guidelines
Print media is paper, card stock, transparencies, labels, and envelopes. Your printer provides
high quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your
printer helps you to avoid printing problems. This chapter provides information on how to
help you make print media selections, how to care for the print media, and how to load it in
the tray 1, optional tray 2, or MPF.
Paper
For the best print quality, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, long grain paper. Try a sample of any
paper you are considering using with the printer before buying large quantities.
When loading paper, note the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the
paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray" and "Using the MPF (Multi
purpose feeder)" for detailed loading instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. We recommend that you
follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) grain
long in the DADF and from 60 to 105g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) grain long in the paper tray.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb bond) may not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams.
For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) long grain paper.
For duplex printing, use 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper
feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is
exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in humid conditions, even in the
paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
The degree of smoothness of the paper directly affects the print quality. If the paper is too
rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper
is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems. Smoothness should be between 100 and
300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the
best print quality.
74
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to
feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.
This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either long grain,
running the length of the paper, or short grain, running the width of the paper.
For 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For papers
heavier than 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond), grain short is preferred. For the MPF, 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to
24 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended.
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. This
content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding
problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess characteristics
that can result in degraded paper handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper.
Business papers designed for general business use may also provide acceptable print quality.
Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When
choosing any print media, consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Use only paper which can withstand these temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or
releasing hazardous emissions. Check with the paper manufacturer or vendor to determine
whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
75
Unacceptable Paper
The following papers are not recommended for use with the printer:
•
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as
carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater
than ± 0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•
Recycled papers containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19
309
•
Recycled paper having a weight less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•
Multiple-part forms or documents
Selecting Paper
Proper paper loading helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
76
•
Always use new, undamaged paper.
•
Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper you are using. This
information is usually indicated on the paper package.
•
Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
•
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source; mixing results in jams.
•
Do not use coated papers.
•
Remember to change the paper size setting when you use a source that does not support
auto size sensing.
•
Do not remove trays while a job is printing.
•
Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the source.
•
Flex paper back and forth. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Selecting Preprinted Forms and Letterhead paper
Use the following guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead paper for the
printer:
•
Use long grain papers for best results.
•
Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing
process.
•
Choose papers that absorb ink, but do not bleed.
•
Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks which have been designed for use in xerographic
copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 180° C (356° F) without melting or releasing
hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the silicone in
the fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks
might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterheads must be able to withstand temperatures up to 180° C
(356° F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
77
Printing on a Letterhead paper
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead paper
that you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on a letterhead paper. Use the following table for
help when loading a letterhead paper in the print media sources.
Print Media Source
tray 1 (standard tray)
optional tray 2
Top of Page
Print Side
Portrait
Landscape
Print side face down for simplex
(single sided) printing
Front of tray
Left side of tray
Print side face up for duplex printing
MPF
78
Face up
Logo enters the Left side of tray
printer first
Selecting Prepunched Paper
Prepunched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in
manufacturing techniques.
Use the following guidelines to select and use prepunched paper:
•
Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of
pre-punched paper.
•
Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already
packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the
printer.
•
Prepunched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may
require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as that of standard
paper.
Transparencies
Try a sample of any transparencies you are considering using with the printer before buying
large quantities:
•
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to
withstand temperatures of 180° C (356° F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting or
releasing hazardous emissions.
•
Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies, as this can cause poor print quality.
•
Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent the sheets from sticking together.
•
Load one transparency at a time into the MPF.
Selecting Transparencies
The printer can print directly on transparencies which have been designed for use in laser
printers. Print quality and durability depends on the transparency used. Always print samples
on the transparencies you are considering before buying large quantities.
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether your transparencies are
compatible with laser printers that heat transparencies to 180° C (356° F). Use only
transparencies that are able to withstand these temperatures without melting, discoloring,
offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Envelopes
Try a sample of any envelopes you are considering using with the printer before buying large
quantities. See "Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for instructions on loading an
envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
79
•
To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality envelopes that are
designed for use in laser printers.
•
For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use
up to 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight for the MPF as long as the cotton content is 25
percent or less.
•
Use only new, undamaged envelopes.
•
For best performance and to minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–
Have excessive curl or twist
–
Are stuck together or damaged in any way
–
Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts or embossing
–
Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
–
Have an interlocking design
–
Have postage stamps attached
–
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
–
Have nicked edges or bent corners
–
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
•
Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 180° C (356° F) without sealing,
excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts
about the envelopes you are considering using, check with the envelope supplier.
•
Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
•
Load an envelope with the flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left side.
The end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the MPF first.
See "Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for instructions on loading an envelope.
80
NOTE: You can improve the printing quality of envelopes by pulling down the rear door to
open and pushing the two blue pressure levers down. This instruction will be especially
helpful for DL and C5 size envelopes.
•
A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperatures may seal
the envelopes.
Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed for use with laser printers. These labels are
supplied in letter size, A4 size, and legal size sheets. Label adhesives, face sheet (printable
stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 180° C (356° F) and pressure
of 25 pounds per square inch (psi). You can load one label sheet at a time in the MPF.
Try a sample of any label you are considering using with the printer before purchasing a large
quantity:
•
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting
in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate your printer and your cartridge with adhesive,
and could void your printer and cartridge warranties.
•
Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 180° C (356° F) without sealing, excessive
curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
•
Do not print within 0.04 in. (1 mm) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or
between die-cuts of the label.
•
Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. We recommend zone
coating of the adhesive at least 0.04 in. (1 mm) away from edges. Adhesive material
contaminates your printer and could void your warranty.
•
If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, a 0.125 in. (3 mm) strip should be
removed on the leading and driver edge, and a non-oozing adhesive should be used.
81
•
Remove a 0.125 in. (3 mm) strip from the leading edge to prevent labels from peeling
inside the printer.
•
Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
•
Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
Card Stock
Card stock is single ply, and has a large array of properties, such as the moisture content,
thickness, and texture, that can significantly affect print quality. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications" for information on the preferred weight for the grain direction of
print media.
Try a sample of any card stock you are considering using with the printer before purchasing a
large quantity:
•
Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing can significantly affect the print
quality and cause print media handling or jamming problems.
•
Avoid using card stock that may release hazardous emissions when heated.
•
Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate
the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
•
We recommend the use of grain long card stock.
Storing Print Media
Use the following guidelines for proper print media storage. These help avoid print media
feeding problems and uneven print quality:
82
•
For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21° C (70° F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
•
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
•
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they
rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.
•
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications
The following tables provide information on standard and optional sources, including the print
media sizes that you can select from the paper size menu and supported weights.
NOTE: If you use a print media size not listed, select the next larger size.
Media Input Capacity
Papera
Paper Tray (tray 1 and optional tray 2) MPFb
Plain paper
250 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb)
50 sheet of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb)
Transparencyc, Labels,
Cards, Envelopes
-
5 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb)
a
b
c
Recommend the use of manual for special media such as transparency, envelope, and card.
For special media in MPF, the feeding quality may be degraded depending on the status of paper.
Recommend the use of short edge for the paper-backed transparency.
Media Output Capacity
Output Location
Description
Face down
150 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper
5 sheets of transparency, envelope, label, and card.
Face upa
a
b
1 sheetb
The face up is mainly for envelope and thick paper.
Push the two blue pressure levers down for better printing quality of envelope, label, card, and thick paper.
Print Media Sizes and Support
Legend
Dimensions
Paper Tray (tray 1 MPF
and optional tray 2)
Duplex printing
8.27 x 11.7 in.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
-
Y
-
Y- indicates Support
Print Media Size
A4
(210 x 297 mm)
A5a
5.83 x 8.27 in.
(148 x 210 mm)
A6
4.13 x 5.85 in.
(105 x 148.5 mm)
83
Legend
Dimensions
Paper Tray (tray 1 MPF
and optional tray 2)
Duplex printing
7.17 x 10.1 in.
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
-
Y
-
-
Y
-
-
Y
-
-
Y
-
-
Y
-
3 x 5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in. -
Y
-
Y- indicates Support
Print Media Size
JIS B5
(182 x 257 mm)
ISO B5
6.93 x 9.84 in.
(176 x 250 mm)
Letter
8.5 x 11 in.
(215.9 x 279.4 mm)
Legal
8.5 x 14 in.
(215.9 x 355.6 mm)
Executive
7.25 x 10.5 in.
(184.2 x 266.7 mm)
Oficio
8.5 x 13.5 in.
(216 x 343 mm)
Folio
8.5 x 13 in.
(216 x 330 mm)
Envelope 7-3/4
(Monarch)
3.875 x 7.5 in.
Envelope COM-10
4.12 x 9.5 in.
(98.4 x 190.5 mm)
(105 x 241 mm)
Envelope DL
4.33 x 8.66 in.
(110 x 220 mm)
EnvelopeC5
6.38 x 9.01 in.
(162 x 229 mm)
EnvelopeC6
4.49 x 6.38 in.
(114 x 162 mm)
Custom
(76 x 127 mm to 216
x 356 mm)
a
84
Ensure the A5 paper is NOT A4 paper that has been cut in half.
Print Media Supported
Print Media (Paper) Types
Paper Tray (tray 1 and optional tray 2)
MPF
Plain, Thin, Recycled, Letterhead
Y
Y
Thick, Bond, Preprinted, Colored
Y
Y
Card Stock
-
Y
Transparencies
-
Y
Labels
-
Y
Dual-web and Integrated Labels
-
Y
Envelopes
-
Y
Print Media Types and Weights
Print Media
Paper
Card
stock-maximum
(grain long)a
Card
stock-maximum
(grain short)a
Transparenciesb
Type
Print Media Weight
Tray 1 and Optional Tray 2
MPF
Xerographic or
business paper
60-90 g/m2 grain long
60-135 g/m2 grain long
(16-24 lb bond)
(16 to 36 lb bond)
Index Bristol
-
120 g/m2 (31 lb)
Tag
-
120 g/m2 (31 lb)
Cover
-
135 g/m2 (35 lb)
Index Bristol
-
163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Tag
-
163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Cover
-
163 g/m2 (43 lb)
Laser printer
-
138-146 g/m2
(37-39 lb bond)
85
Print Media
Labels-maximum
Type
Paper
Print Media Weight
Tray 1 and Optional Tray 2
MPF
-
163 g/m2
(43 lb bond)
Dual-web paper
-
163 g/m2
(43 lb bond)
Polyester
-
163 g/m2
(43 lb bond)
Vinyl
-
163 g/m2
(43 lb liner)
Integrated Forms
Pressuresensitive area
(must enter the
printer first)
-
(36-40 lb bond)
Paper base (grain long)
Envelopes 100%
Cotton Content
Maximum Weight24 lb
a
b
86
Sulfite,
wood-free or up
to 100% cotton
bonds
135-140 g/m2
-
Grain short is preferred for papers over 135 g/m2.
Thickness: 0.1 to 0.15 mm
75-135 g/m2
(20-36 lb bond)
75-90 g/m2
(20-24 lb)
Selecting an Output Location
The printer has two output locations; the output tray (face down) and the rear door (face up).
Rear Door
Output Tray
To use the output tray, ensure that the rear door is closed. To use the rear door, open it.
NOTE: If paper coming out of the output tray has problems, such as excessive curl, try printing to
the rear door.
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear door while the printer is printing.
87
Printing to the Output Tray (Face down)
The output tray collects printed paper face-down, in the correct order. The tray should be used
for most print jobs.
If necessary, expand the paper output extension to keep the print media from falling off the
output tray.
Printing to the Rear Door (Face up)
Using the rear door, the paper comes out of the printer face up.
Printing from the MPF to the rear door provides a straight paper path. Using the rear door
might improve the output quality with special materials.
To use the rear door:
Open the rear door by pulling it.
CAUTION: The fuser area inside of the rear door of your printer becomes very hot when in use.
Take care when you access this area.
88
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
You can load approximately 250 sheets of plain paper in the tray 1 or the optional tray 2. If you
purchased the optional tray 2, see "Installing an Optional Tray 2" for installing instructions. For
faxing, you can use A4, letter or legal paper only. For copying or printing, you can use many
different types and sizes of paper; see "Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications".
Follow these instructions to load print media into the tray 1 or optional tray 2. These trays are
loaded the same way.
1
Pull open the paper tray and load paper with the print side face down.
You can load letterhead paper with the design side face down. The top edge of the sheet
with the logo should be placed at the front side of the tray.
For details about loading paper in the paper tray, see "Loading Paper".
NOTE: If you experience problems with paper feed, place the paper in the MPF.
NOTE: You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be facing up with an uncurled
edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that the
print quality is not guaranteed.
89
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
Use the MPF to print transparencies, labels, envelopes or postcards in addition to making
quick runs of paper types or sizes that are not currently loaded in the paper tray.
Postcards, 3.5 by 5.83 in. (index) cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with
this printer. The minimum size is 3.0 by 5.0 in. (76 by 127 mm) and the maximum size is 8.5
by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm).
Acceptable print materials are plain paper with sizes ranging from 3.0 by 5.0 in. (76 by 127
mm) to Legal, 8.5 by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm), the largest size acceptable, and weighing
between 16 lb and 43 lb.
NOTE: Always load only the print materials specified in the Specifications on "Paper Specifications"
to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
NOTE: Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before loading them into the MPF.
To use the MPF:
1
Open the MPF and unfold the paper support extension, as shown.
2
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading.
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side. Oils from
your fingers can cause print quality problems.
90
3
Load the print material with the side to be printed on facing up.
Depending on the paper type you are using, keep the following loading method:
4
•
Envelopes: load them with the flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left
side.
•
Transparencies: load them with the print side up and the top with the adhesive strip
entering the printer first.
•
Labels: load them with the print size up and the top short edge entering the printer
first.
•
Preprinted paper: load with the design face up, top edge toward the printer.
•
Card stock: load them with the print side up and the short edge entering the printer
first.
•
Pre printed paper: the printed side should be facing down with an uncurled edge
toward the printer.
Squeeze the width guide and adjust it to the width of the print material. Do not force too
much, or the paper will be bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.
91
5
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the MPF. See "Setting the Paper Type"
for copying and faxing or "Paper Tab" for Computer printing.
NOTE: The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the operator panel.
CAUTION: Ensure that the rear door opens when you print on transparencies. If not, they may tear
while exiting the machine.
6
After printing, fold away the paper support extension and close the MPF.
Tips on using the MPF
92
•
Load only one size of print material at a time in the MPF.
•
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in the MPF. This also
applies to other types of print materials.
•
Print materials should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the MPF first and
be placed in the center of the tray.
•
Always load only the print materials specified in "Print Media Guidelines" to avoid paper
jams and print quality problems.
•
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the MPF.
•
When you print on 3 by 5 in. (76 by 127 mm) sized media on the MPF, open the rear
door for a straight paper path to avoid paper jams.
•
Ensure that the rear door opens when you print on transparencies. If not, they may tear
while exiting the machine.
Setting the Paper Size
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size from the operator panel.
This setting will apply to Fax and Copy modes. For Computer printing, you need to select the
paper type in the application program you use.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the main screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Paper Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the paper tray you want to use.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the paper size you are using.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Paper Type
After loading paper in the paper tray or the MPF, you need to set the paper type from the
operator panel. This setting will apply to Fax and Copy modes. For faxing, you can only set the
paper type to the Plain mode. For Computer printing, you need to select the paper type in the
application program you use.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Paper Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the paper tray you want to use.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the paper type you are using.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Paper Margin
You can set the paper margin for simplex or duplex printing.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the main screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Paper Setup.
4
Press Margin.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select the paper tray you want to use.
6
Press the printing type you want to use.
7
Select a target such as Top Margin, Left Margin, Short Binding, Long Binding, and etc.
to set the paper margin.
8
Adjust the option you want using the left/right arrows
9
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
93
Setting the Paper Tray
This feature allows you to select the tray and paper that you want to use for a printing job.
Paper size and paper tray are adjusted here.
Setting the Tray linking
If tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and this option is On,
then the machine continues printing using the paper in tray 2.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Behavior.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Linking.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the On you want to use.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Substitute Tray
When the paper is mismatched, meaning that tray 1 is filled with the letter size paper, but the
printing job needs A4 size paper, the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized
paper.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Behavior.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Substitute Tray.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select Nearest Size.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Default Tray
You can select the tray you want to use for printing job.
94
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Behavior.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Default Source.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the paper tray you are using.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the paper feeding flow
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Behavior.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Configure MPF.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the paper tray you are using.
6
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
•
Tray Mode: When sending a print job from the computer, the printer uses paper in
the tray which you have already set in Printer properties. In this mode the MPF is
treated as another paper tray. Instead of treating MPF as first preference paper
source, printer pulls paper from the tray that matches the size and type. The first
preference goes to the default source.
•
Bypass Mode: When sending a print job from the computer and the MPF is filled
with paper, the printer uses the paper in the MPF first. In this mode the printer pulls
the paper from MPF first unless it is closed or empty. MPF gets the highest priority
and pulls whatever media present in the MPF. Bypass Mode is set as a default
setting.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the paper auto feeding
When the paper is mismatched, the machine waits for a while (about few seconds) and starts
printing automatically even if the paper mismatches.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Behavior.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the Auto Continue.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the On you want to use.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
95
Tray Behavior
Tray Linking
Tray linking enables the automatic linking feature for trays when you load the same size and
type of print media in multiple sources. The printer automatically links the trays; when one
tray is not available for paper empty or mismatch, the printer will use the next available linked
tray to feed print media for the printing.
For example, if you have the same size and type of print media loaded in tray 2, the printer
selects print media from tray 2 until it becomes empty, and then the printer automatically
feeds print media from the next linked tray.
By linking all trays (standard and optional), you effectively create a single source with a
capacity of up to 550 sheets.
Make sure you load the same size and type of print media in each tray in order to link the trays.
Set the paper size and type for each tray.
To disable tray linking you can either choose unique paper size/type for each tray or using
operator panel to disable tray linking.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print, copy, and fax job.
NOTE: To prevent a paper jam, do not open tray 1 while the machine is printing from tray 2.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
) button.
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Behavior.
4 Press the up/down arrows to select Tray Linking.
5 Press the left/right arrows to On for enable and Off to disable tray linking.
6 Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
3
Substitute Size
This setting is used to determine whether the printer can substitute with another paper size
when the requested paper size is not available in any of the input trays. The Printer will
substitute A4/Letter, A5/Statement, B5/ISO B5, and Folio/Oficio. For example if A4 is requested
paper size and there is no A4 paper in any of the input source then the printer will print on
Letter size paper, if available.
Substitute size set to Off means no substitution is allowed for the requested paper size. This
option is not applied for received fax printing.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print and copy job.
96
MPF
MPF can be configured to behave in Tray Mode or in Bypass Mode by setting the Configure
MPF menu in the operator panel.
Bypass Mode
In this mode the printer pulls the paper from MPF first unless it is closed or empty. MPF gets
the highest priority and pulls whatever media is present in the MPF.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print and copy job.
Tray Mode
In this mode the MPF is treated as another paper tray. Instead of treating MPF as first
preference paper source, printer pulls paper from the tray that matches the size and type. The
first preference goes to the default source.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print, copy, and fax job.
97
98
Printing
Printing a Document
Printer Settings
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper
Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size
Printing Posters
Change Percentage of Your Document
Printing Booklets
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Using Watermarks
Using Overlays
Printing a Document
Your printer prints documents using the Printer Control Language (PCL) or PostScript (PS)
printer driver. When you install the Dell software, your printer automatically installs the PCL
printer driver. Installing the PS printer driver is optional. See "Installing Dell Software for
Local Printing".
The drivers provided with your printer allow a wide variety of options. Use the chart below to
determine which print driver is best suited for the job.
The features provided by each printer driver are as follows:
Feature
Printer Driver
PCL
PS
Print quality option
Y
Y
Poster
Y
Y
Reduce/Enlarge
Y
Y
Multiple Pages per Side
Y
Y
Fit to Page
Y
Y
Watermark
Y
Y
Overlay
Y
N
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various
Windows applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the
application program you are using. Refer to your software application’s User’s Guide for the
exact printing procedure.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window displays. It may look slightly different depending on your application.
The basic print settings are selected within the Print window. These settings include the
number of copies and print range.
100
Ensure that your printer is
selected.
▲ Windows XP
3
Select the printer driver that you want to use from the Print window.
4
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer, click Preferences or
Properties, depending on the program or operating system in the above window and go to
step 5.
If you see Setup, Printer or Options, click that button instead. Then click Properties on
the next screen.
5
Click OK to close the printer properties window.
6
To start the print job, click Print or OK, depending on the program or operating system
in the Print window.
101
Canceling a Print Job
There are two ways to cancel a print job:
To stop a print job from the operator panel:
Press Cancel ( ).
Your printer finishes printing the page in progress and deletes the rest of the print job. Pressing
the button cancels only the current job. If more than one print job is in the printer’s memory,
you need to press the button once for each job.
To stop a print job from the Printers folder:
NOTE: You can access this window simply by double-clicking the printer icon at the bottom right
corner of the Windows desktop.
1
From the Windows Start button.
2
For Windows 2000, click Settings and point to Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click Control Panel
Printers.
For Windows 7, click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
For Windows Server 2008 R2, click Control Panel
Printers.
102
Hardware and Sound
Hardware
Devices and Printers.
Devices and
3
For Windows 2000, XP, 2003, 2008 and Vista, double-click your machine.
For Windows 7, right click your printer icon
See what’ s printing.
4
From the Document menu, click Cancel.
▲ Windows XP
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access all of the printer options
you may need when using your printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can
review and change any settings needed for your print job.
The printer properties window may differ, depending on the printer driver you select and your
operating system. For details about selecting a printer driver, see "Printing a Document". The
User’s Guide shows the Printing Preferences window of the PCL printer driver on Windows XP.
NOTE: Most Windows applications override settings you specified in the printer driver. Change all
of the print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings
using the printer driver.
NOTE: The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the current program. To
make your changes permanent, make them in the Printers folder. Follow these steps:
a
Click the Windows Start button.
b
For Windows 2000, click Settings and point to Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click Control Panel
Printers.
For Windows 7, click Control Panel
Printers.
Hardware and Sound
Hardware and Sound
For Windows Server 2008 R2, click Control Panel
Printers.
Hardware
Devices and
Devices and
c
Point to the Dell 2355dn Laser MFP printer.
d
Right-click on the printer icon and click Print Setup or click Properties.
e
Change the settings on each tab and click OK.
103
Basic Tab
The Basic tab provides options for you to adjust how the document appears on the printed
page. The Layout Options section includes advanced printing options, such as Multiple Pages
Per Side and Poster Printing.
➊
The preview image
shows the sample page
with the settings you
currently specified.
➋
➌
➍
Property
➊ Orientation
Description
Orientation allows you to select the direction in which information is
printed on a page.
• Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.
• Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet style.
If you want to rotate the page 180-degrees, check Rotate 180 Degrees.
▲ Portrait
▲ Landscape
Mirror Image specifies mirrored output. Check to print a mirror image of
the document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. This feature is
available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
104
Property
Description
➋Quality
You can select the printing resolution by choosing from Best or Normal. The
higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics.
Higher settings may increase the time it takes to print a document.
➌Layout Options
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options. For details,
see "Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper", "Printing Posters"
and "Printing Booklets".
➍ Double-Sided
Double-Sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper. For
details, see "Printing on Both Sides of Paper".
Printing
Paper Tab
Use the following options to set the paper handling needs when you access the printer
properties. Click the Paper tab to access the paper properties.
NOTE: When you select an option in properties, you may see an exclamation (
) mark or ( )
mark. An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option but it is no recommended, and
( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the printer’s setting or environment.
➊
➋
➌
➍
➏
Property
➊ Copies
➎
Description
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed. You can
enter up to 999.
105
Property
➋ Size
Description
The Size option allows you to choose the size of paper loaded in the paper
tray.
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Edit.... When the
Custom Paper Size Setting window appears, set the paper size and click
OK. The setting appears on the list so that you can select it.
Enter the custom name
you want to use.
Enter the paper size.
➌ Source
Ensure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.
➍ Type
Ensure that Type is set to Printer Default. If you load a different type of
print material, select the corresponding paper type. For more information
about print materials, refer to "Print Media Guidelines".
➎ Advanced
This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper type
from the rest of the document. You can select the paper source for the first
page. This feature is not available when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer automatically picks
up print materials from the MPF first and then the paper tray.
If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to the default setting.
➏ Scaling Options
106
Scaling Options allows you to select advanced printing options.
For details, see "Change Percentage of Your Document" and "Fitting Your
Document to a Selected Paper Size".
Graphic Tab
Use the following graphic options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs.
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.
➊
➋
107
Property
➊ Font /
Text
Description
All Text Black
When the All Text Black option is checked, all text in your document is
allowed to print solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.
When it is not checked, colored text is allowed to print in shades of gray.
Advanced
True Type Options determines what the driver tells the printer about how to
image the text in your document. Select the appropriate setting according to
the status of your document.
• Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will download
any TrueType fonts that are used in your documents, which is not stored
(resident) on your printer. If, after printing a document, you find that the
fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit
your print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful when
printing Adobe.
• Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the driver downloads
the font data as bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts, such as
Korean or Chinese, print faster in this setting.
• Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver downloads any
fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic content and
relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance (speed) may be
enhanced in this setting.
Use Printer Fonts
When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored
in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than
downloading the fonts that have been used in your document. Because
downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your
printing time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the
fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory. If, however, you
use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the
printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like
on the screen.
If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to the default setting.
108
Property
Description
➋ Toner Save
Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your
cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality.
NOTE: You also change Toner Save in the Printer Settings Utility.
➌ Graphic
This feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
Controller
➍ PostScript Options
Negative Effect: allows users to print a negative of image by reversing the
values for black and white.
This feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
Output Option: This option allows you to select the output format for
PostScript files.
• Optimize for Speed: General format for PostScript files.
• Optimize for Portability: Creates a file that conforms to the Adobe
Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). This is a useful format to use
when you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different machine.
• Encapsulated PostScript (EPS): Creates a file as a image. This is a useful
format to use if you want include the file as an image in another document
that will be printed from a different program.
• Archive Format: Creates a PostScript file you can use it later.
PostScript Language: This option allows you to choose the PostScript
language level.
Send PostScript Error Handler: If this option is checked, the machine prints
an error page when an error occurs during printing.
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to the default
setting.
109
Advanced Tab
Click the Advanced tab to access the following features:
➊
➋
➌
❹
Property
110
Description
➊ Watermark
You can create a background image of text to print on each page of your
document. See "Using Watermarks".
➋ Overlay
This feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and letterhead
paper. See "Using Overlays".
Property
➌ Output Options
Description
Print Order
You can set the sequence for the pages to print. Select the print order from the
drop-down list.
• Normal: Your printer prints all pages from the first page to the last page.
• Reverse All Pages: Your printer prints all pages from the last page to the first
page.
• Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd pages of the document.
• Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even pages of the document.
Advanced (This feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.)
PostScript PassThrough: This option specifies whether to print PostScript data
created by the application that can create the PostScript code for printing. The
default is checked. If this option is checked, some print options such as Multiple
Pages Per Side, Watermark, Booklet Printing, Poster Printing and Scaling
Options may not work correctly when printing from the application that can create
the PostScript code for printing. In that case, please uncheck this option. In some
cases, unchecking PostScript PassThrough may cause unexpected printout.
If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to the default setting.
❹
Job Settings
You can set the usage of the HDD, such as whether you store the data file in the
HDD inside the machine or print directly.
Print Mode
• Normal: Your printer does not store the print data.
• Proof: When printing several copies of print, the printer prints out the first
copy of print and continues to print the rest of them.
• Confidential: You can set the password not to delete the print data file by
mistake.
User ID
You can enter the user name with combination of alphabets and numbers. This
information will be displayed on the touch screen when you find the file.
Job Name
You can enter the job name with combination of alphabets and numbers. This
information will be displayed on the touch screen when you find the file.
Dell Tab
Use the Dell tab to display the copyright notice and the version number of the driver. If you
have an Internet browser, you can connect to the Internet by clicking the Dell Website icon.
111
Using a Presets Setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each properties tab, allows you to save the current
properties settings for future use.
To save a Presets item:
1
Change the settings on each tab, as needed.
2
Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.
3
Click Add (
).
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-down list. The machine is now set to
print according to the setting you selected.
To delete a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-down list and click Delete (
).
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Printer Default from the list.
Using Help
Click the
from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to
know about. Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature
which is provided from the driver.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the Printing Preferences
window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option.
112
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one
page per sheet, the pages will appear decreased in size and arranged on the sheet. You can print
up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the Basic tab, choose Multiple Pages Per Side on the Type drop-down list.
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) on the Pages per
Side drop-down list.
4
If necessary, select the page order on the Page Order drop-down list.
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
1
3
4
2
4
4
3
4
2
Right, Then
Down
Down, Then
Right
Left, Then
Down
1
2
3
4
Down, Then
Left
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. Print Page
Border is enabled only if the Pages per Side setting is set to a number greater than one.
113
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and type.
6
Click OK and print the document.
Change Percentage of Your Document
You can scale your print job on a page.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the Paper tab.
3
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the
114
or
button.
4
Select the paper source, size, and type.
5
Click OK and print the document.
Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size
You can scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the original document size.
This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the Paper tab.
3
Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page.
4
Select the paper source, size, and type.
5
Click OK and print the document.
A
115
Printing Posters
You can print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of
pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
3
Select the page layout you want.
Specification of the page layout:
▲ 2x2
•
•
•
4
Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.
Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.
Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages.
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting
the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.
0.1 inches
116
0.1 inches
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and type.
6 Click OK and print the document. You can complete the poster by reconstructing the results.
5
Printing Booklets
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and arranges
the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing in the Type drop-down list.
8
9
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the
available paper size for this feature, select the paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab, then
check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout Options drop-down list on the Basic tab is activated.
3
Select the paper source, size, and type.
4
Click OK and print the document.
117
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Your printer prints on both sides of the paper automatically.
Before printing, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document. The
binding options are:
•
Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in book binding.
•
Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.
2
2
3
2
3
2
5
5
3
5
3
5
▲ Long Edge
▲ Short Edge
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or thick paper. Damage to
the printer and paper jamming might result.
NOTE: To use the double-sided printing, you can use only the following paper size: A4, Letter, Legal
and Folio.
118
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the Basic tab, select the paper orientation.
3
From the Double-Sided Printing section, select the desired binding option.
4
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and type.
5
Click OK and print the document.
Your printer prints on both sides of the paper automatically.
Using Watermarks
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you
may want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed
diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with your printer. They can be modified or
you can add new ones to the list.
Using an Existing Watermark
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the Advanced tab and select a watermark on the Watermark drop-down list. It
appears in the preview image window.
119
Preview image
3
Click OK and start printing.
Creating a Watermark
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks
window appears.
3
Enter the text message you want to print in the Watermark Message box.
The message displays in the preview image window. The preview image is provided so
that you can see how the watermark will appear on the printed page.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark is printed on the first page only.
NOTE: You can enter up to 256 letters.
4
Select the watermark options.
You can select the font name, style and size and gray scale level from the Font Attributes
section and set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section.
5
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.
6
When you finish creating, click OK and start printing.
To stop printing the watermark, select None on the Watermark drop-down list.
Editing a Watermark
120
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks
window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the
watermark message and options.
4
Click Update to save the changes.
5
Click OK.
Deleting a Watermark
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks
window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to delete on the Current Watermarks list and click
Delete.
4
Click OK.
121
Using Overlays
What is an Overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file
format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create
an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print
a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in
the printer. You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document.
Creating a New Page Overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as documents you will print with the overlay.
Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
WORLD BEST
122
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay.
Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. If
needed, save the file for later use.
2
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
3
Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Overlay section.
4
In the Edit Overlays window, click Create.
5
In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select
the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\FormOver).
6
Click Save. You can see the name in the Overlay List.
7
Click OK or Yes until you complete creating.
The file is not printed out; it is stored in your computer.
Using a Page Overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an
overlay with a document:
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay must be the same as the resolution of the document that will
print with the overlay.
1
Create or open the document you want to print.
2
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
3
Click the Advanced tab.
123
4
Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list box.
5
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from
the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the
overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you
access the Load window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file is now shown in the Overlay List box and is
available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box.
6
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When Printing. When this box is checked, a
message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to
confirm that you want to print an overlay on your document.
Answering Yes to the window means that the selected overlay will be printed with your
document. Answering No to the window cancels the use of the overlay page.
If this box is empty and an overlay has been selected, the overlay will be automatically
printed with your document.
7
Click OK or Yes until the printing starts.
The overlay is downloaded with your print job and printed on your document.
124
Deleting a Page Overlay
You can delete page overlays that are no longer used.
1
In the printer properties window, click the Advanced tab.
2
Click Edit... in the Overlay section.
3
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
4
Click Delete.
5
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
6
Click OK until you exit the Print window.
125
126
Copying
Loading Paper for Copying
Selecting the Paper Tray
Preparing a Document
Loading an Original Document
Making Copies
Setting Copy Options
Using Special Copy Features
Printing Copies on Both Sides of Paper
Preparing a Document
Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print materials are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or
copying. For further details, see "Loading Paper" for loading paper in the paper tray and "Using
the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for loading paper in the multi purpose tray.
Selecting the Paper Tray
After loading the print media for copy output, you have to select the paper tray that you will
use for the copy job.
1
Press Copy from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Tray.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the paper tray you want.
) button.
You can select from Tray1, Tray2 (option) and MPF (multi purpose tray). If you do not
install the optional tray 2, the Tray2 (option) menu item will not appear on the display.
5
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) to load
an original document for copying, scanning and sending a fax. Using the DADF, you can load
up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job. Using the document glass, you can
load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document
glass instead of the DADF.
When you use the DADF:
128
•
Do not load documents smaller than 5.59 by 5.83 in. (142 by 148 mm) or larger than 8.5
by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm).
•
Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents:
–
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
–
Coated paper
–
Onion skin or thin paper
–
Wrinkled or creased paper
–
Curled or rolled paper
–
Torn paper
–
Corner damage caused by excessive stapling/removal.
•
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading documents.
•
Ensure that any glue, ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading
documents.
•
Do not load documents containing different sizes or weights of paper.
•
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies or documents having other unusual
characteristics.
Loading an Original Document
You can use the DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) or the document glass to load
an original document. Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper
at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the DADF, it has
priority over the document on the document glass.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document
glass instead of the DADF.
NOTE: If you use duplex copy features, see "Printing Copies on Both Sides of Paper".
To load the document in the DADF:
1
Place the document(s) face up on the DADF with the top edge of the documents in first
129
2
Adjust the document width guides to the correct document size. Ensure that the bottom
of the document stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray.
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document, see "Preparing a Document".
To load the document in the document glass:
130
1
Open the document cover.
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration
guide on the top left corner of the glass.
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document, see "Preparing a Document".
3
Close the document cover.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are
caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the cover open.
NOTE: Leaving the cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and toner
consumption.
Making Copies
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Contaminating on the document glass may cause black spots on the printout. For best
results, clean the document glass before use. See "Cleaning the scanner".
1
Load the document(s) face up with the top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the contrast, and
the image quality by using the operator panel. See "Setting Copy Options".
3
If necessary, you can use special copy features, such as ECO, Book, Collate, Auto Fit,
Clone, Poster, ID copying, and n-up copy referring to "Using Special Copy Features".
4
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
, and the copying will stop.
131
Setting Copy Options
The Manual Copy menus on the operator panel let you customize all the basic copy options;
number of copies, copy size, contrast and image quality. Set the following options for the
current copy job before pressing Start ( ) to make copies.
NOTE: If you press AC while you set the copy options, all of the options you have set for the current
copy job will be canceled and return to their default status. Or, they automatically return to their
default status after copying.
Number of Copies
You can select the number of copies from 1 to 500.
1
Press Copy from the home screen.
2
Enter the value you want using the number keypad.
3
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
and the copying will stop.
Enlarge/Reduce Copy
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent, when you
copy original documents from the document glass or the DADF. Note that the zoom rate
available is different depending on the document loading method.
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.
To select from the predefined copy sizes:
1
Press Copy from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Zoom.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the zoom rate you want.
) button.
You can select from 25~400%.
132
Contrast
Adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
1
Press Copy from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Contrast.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the contrast you want.
) button.
Original Size
You can set the size of a copied image, when you copy original documents from the documents
glass or the DADF.
1
Press Copy from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Original Size.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the original size you want.
) button.
Original Type
The original type setting is used to improve the image quality by selecting the document type
for the current copy job.
1
Press Copy from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Original Type.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the image quality mode you want.
) button.
•
Text: Use for documents with fine details, such as fine text.
•
Text & Photo: Use for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
•
Photo: Use for documents with photo or gray tones.
133
Using Special Copy Features
NOTE: Some features may not be available depending on where you loaded the document, on the
document glass or in the DADF.
NOTE: The menu items of Collate Copy, 2 up, and 4 up may be available only when you loaded the
document in the DADF.
You can use the following copy features using the Copy menu:
134
•
ECO Copy: The eco feature allows you to save print resources and leads you to
eco-friendly copy. See "ECO Copying".
•
Book Copy: Use this feature to copy. See "Book Copying".
•
Collate Copy: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals. See "Collate
Copying".
•
Auto Fit Copy: Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image to fit on the paper
currently loaded in the printer. See "Auto Fit Copying".
•
Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a single page.
The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and paper size.
See "Clone Copying".
•
Poster Copy: Prints an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3 by 3). You can paste the printed
pages together to make one poster-size document. See "Poster Copying".
•
ID Copy: Prints a 2-sided original document onto one sheet of paper. See "ID Copying".
•
N-up Copy: Prints 2 or 4 original images to fit onto one sheet of paper. See "2-up or 4-up
copying (N-up)".
ECO Copying
You can cut toner consumption and paper usage.
To make the ECO copying:
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Copy from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select ECO Copy.
4
Press Options.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select in an environment friendly option.
6
Press the left/right arrows to select you want.
7
Press
8
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
to go to the upper menu.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
, and the copying will stop.
Book Copying
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are
engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than
30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document
glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the book copying feature does not work.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Copy from the home screen.
3
Press Book Copy
4
Press Book Copy.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select you want.
Options.
•
Both: Prints both facing pages of the book.
•
Left: Prints left page of the book.
•
Right: Prints right page of the book.
135
6
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, original
size, and original type. See "Setting Copy Options".
7
Press
8
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
to go to the upper menu.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
, and the copying will stop.
Collate Copying
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the DADF.
To make the Collate copying:
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Copy from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Collate Copy.
4
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, original
type, and original size by pressing Options. See "Setting Copy Options".
5
Press
6
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
to go to the upper menu.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
, and the copying will stop.
Auto Fit Copying
A
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document
glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the Auto Fit does not work.
. NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu while the Auto Fit copying is enabled.
To make the Auto Fit copying:
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Copy from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Auto Fit Copy.
4
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, original
type, and original size by pressing Options. See "Setting Copy Options".
5
Press
6
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
to go to the upper menu.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
136
, and the copying will stop.
Clone Copying
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document
glass. If a document is detected on the DADF, the Clone copying feature does not work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu while making a clone copy.
To make the Clone copying:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
Press Copy from the home screen.
Press the left/right arrows to select Clone Copy.
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, original
type, and original size by pressing Options. See "Setting Copy Options".
Press
to go to the upper menu.
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
, and the copying will stop.
Poster Copying
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document
glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the Poster copying feature does not work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu button for making a poster.
To make the Poster copying:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
Press Copy from the home screen.
Press the left/right arrows to select Poster Copy.
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, original
type, and original size by pressing Options. See "Setting Copy Options".
Press
to go to the upper menu.
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
, and the copying will stop.
Your original document is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and printed
one by one in the following order:
137
ID Copying
When you copy using this feature, the printer prints one side on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the original. This feature is helpful for
copying a small-sized document, such as a name card.
If the original document is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document
glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the ID copying feature does not work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu for ID copying.
To make the ID copying:
1
Press ID Copy (
) in the operator panel.
OR
Press Copy
ID Copy from the home screen.
2
Place the front side of an original facing down on the document glass where arrows
indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.
3
Press the Next (
4
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, original
type, and original size by pressing Options. See "Setting Copy Options".
5
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
6
Turn the original over and place it on the document glass, where arrows indicate as shown
then, close the scanner lid.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
) button.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
138
, and the copying will stop.
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
2
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of
paper. This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the DADF.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu for making a 2 Up or 4 Up copy.
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Copy from the home screen.
3
Press N-up Copy
4
Press N-up.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select 2 up or 4 up.
Options.
1
1
▲ 2-up copying
(Portrait)
1
2
▲ 2-up copying
(Landscape)
•
2 up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.
•
4 up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.
6
Press the left/right arrows to select Portrait or Landscape according to the original paper’s
orientation.
7
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, original
size, and original type. See "Setting Copy Options".
8
Press
9
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
1
2
3
4
▲ 4-up copying
(Portrait)
to go to the upper menu.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
, and the copying will stop.
▲ 4-up copying
(Landscape)
Printing Copies on Both Sides of Paper
You can set the printer to print copies on both sides of paper.
1
Load the documents to be copied in the DADF.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Copy from the home screen
3
Press the Options or Next (
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Duplex.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the binding option you want.
•
) button.
1->1 side: Prints in normal mode.
139
•
1->2 Side Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
•
1->2 Side Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping through it like a note pad.
•
2->1 Side Long Edge: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of them on a
separate sheet.
•
2->1 Side Short Edge: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each one on a
separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is rotate 180°.
•
2->2 Side Long Edge: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of
the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals.
6
If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size,
contrast, and image quality. See "Setting Copy Options".
7
Press Start ( ) to begin copying.
Changing the Default Settings
The copy options, including contrast, image quality, copy size, and the number of copies, can
be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the default settings are
used unless they are changed by using the operator panel.
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing ( ) cancels the changed settings and returns to the
default status.
To create your own default settings:
140
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press Default Setting.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select Copy Default.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select Common.
6
Press the up/down arrows to select the copy option.
7
Press the left/right arrows to select the you want option.
8
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Scanning
Scanning Overview
SmarThru Office
Scanning Using Dell Scan Manager
Scanning to a PC Application
Scanning and Sending an Email
Scanning and Sending to SMB Server
Scanning and Sending to FTP Server
Scanning and Sending Custom Email
Scan to Fax Server
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)
Driver
Scanning to the USB Memory
Managing the USB Memory
Scan to Email Setup
Scanning by a network connection
Setting up Address Book
Group Numbers
Changing Default Settings
Scanning Overview
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored
on your computer. Then you can fax or email the files, upload them to your website, or use
them to create projects that you can print.
The scanning methods are scan to email, scan to computer (local and network), and scan to
USB.
Use your Dell 2355dn Laser MFP to convert pictures and text into editable images on your
computer. After you install the software from the Software and Documentation CD, you can
scanning images using SmarThru Office on your computer, or through the network using Dell
Scan Manager, which enables you to scan a document on your printer as a JPEG, TIFF or PDF
and save it to a network-connected computer. Or, you can send the scanned image as an e-mail
attachment directly from the printer.
NOTE: SmarThru Office is the scanning program provided with your printer.
NOTE: If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe PhotoShop, you must assign the
application to the printer by selecting it from the list of available applications. Please refer to
"Scanning Using Dell Scan Manager".
SmarThru Office
SmarThru Office offers you convenient features to use with your machine.
Starting SmarThru Office
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office:
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to
each other.
2
Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see the SmarThru Office icon on
your desktop.
3
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.
NOTE: If you double-click the SmarThru Office icon, the Quick Start Guide window pops up. The
Quick Start Guide window includes following menus: Categories, Binder, Life Cycle, Scan and OCR,
and Fix and Enhance. You can disable this window by checking “Do not show this dialog again”.
142
4
The SmarThru Office appears.
For more information about SmarThru Office, click SmarThru Office help
SmarThru Office help. The SmarThru Office help window appears; you can view on
screen help supplied on the SmarThru Office program.
NOTE: Click the SmarThru Office icon
SmarThru Office launcher.
in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to activate the
NOTE: Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru Office. Before you begin the uninstall, ensure
that all applications are closed on your computer.
a
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
b
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall SmarThru Office.
c
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, read the statement and
click OK.
d
Click Finish.
Using SmarThru Office
1
Click the SmarThru Office icon
the SmarThru Office launcher.
2
Click the scanning icon
in the tray area of the windows taskbar to activate
to open the scanning window.
143
3
Scan Setting window opens.
➊
➋
➌
➍
Property
Description
➊ Select Scanner
Allows you to select the scanner.
➋ Select Profile
Allows you to save settings frequently used for future use. Click New
Profile to save the setting.
➌ Scan Settings
Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size and Paper Source.
❹
Allows you to customize settings for File Name and location to send
scanned data.
Scan To
NOTE: Click Advanced button to set more scan options.
4
Set scan settings and click Scan.
Printing
144
1
Click the SmarThru icon
SmarThru Office launcher.
2
Click the printing icon
in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to active the
to open the faxing window.
3
Select the file you want to print.
4
Select the machine you want to use for printing.
5
Click Print to start the job.
Sending a File via Fax
You can fax while working on SmarThru Office.
1
Click the SmarThru Office icon
SmarThru Office launcher.
2
Click the faxing icon
3
Set fax settings and click Send Fax.
in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to active the
to open the printing window.
•
Select Fax Machine: Choose whether the machine is connected locally or via
network. If the machine is in network, click Browse to insert the IP address and other
information.
•
Pages Ready: Select file you want to fax. Click Add.
•
Recipients: Click Add to enter the fax number.
•
Cover Page: If you need a cover page, enter the values for the options. If not, click
Skip Cover Page.
•
Fax Settings: If the original document is faded or not vivid, click Fine. In this case,
the fax speed could be low.
Sending a File to FTP
You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru Office.
1
Click the SmarThru Office icon
SmarThru Office launcher.
2
Click the FTP icon
3
Send By FTP window opens.
4
Add your file and click Upload.
in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to active the
to open the printing window.
Sending a File to Email
1
Click the SmarThru icon
SmarThru Office launcher.
in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to active the
2
Click the email icon
3
Send By E-mail window opens.
4
An email client opens.
5
Type in necessary information and send your email.
to open the printing window.
145
Scanning Using Dell Scan Manager
About Dell Scan Manager
You just walk to the machine with the originals and scan them from the control panel, then the
scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Document folder. When the
setup installation is completed, then you have installed the Dell Scan Manager on your
computer already. This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection.
Setting scan information in Dell Scan Manager
You can find out about Dell Scan Manager program information and installed scan driver's
condition. Also, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders in which
documents scanned to computer are saved in Dell Scan Manager program.
NOTE: Dell Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window system.
1
From the Start menu, select Programs
Dell Scan Manager.
2
Press Properties.
Dell Printers
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
You can add the scanning machine by using Add Device. (Local or Network)
146
3
4
In the Set Scan Button window, select the scan setting option.
•
Scan Destination: You can change the add or delete application programs and file
format.
•
Scan Property: You can change the saving destination, resolution, color, and scan
size.
Press OK after the setting is done.
147
Scanning to a PC Application
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Scan from the main screen.
3
Press Local PC or Network PC.
4
Press the Next (
5
Press the up/down arrows until the application program you want.
) button.
If you select Network PC, select your computer ID and password using the pop-up
keyboard.
•
Microsoft Paint: Sends the scanned image to Microsoft Paint.
•
Email: Sends the scanned image to your default email program on the computer. A
new message window opens with the image attached.
•
My Document: Saves the scanned image in the My Documents folder on the
computer.
NOTE: You can add more TWAIN-compliant software for scanning, such as Adobe Photoshop, from
the Dell Scan Manager. See "Scanning Using Dell Scan Manager".
6
If necessary, customize the scan settings including original size, scan color, scan format,
duplex, and image quality by using Options.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
Scanning is started.
148
8
The selected application window opens. Adjust the scan settings and scan. For details,
please refer to the user’s guide of the application.
NOTE: If you selected My Document scanned image is saved in computer's My Document → My
Pictures → Dell folder.
NOTE: You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Dell Scan Manager program.
Scanning and Sending an Email
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Scan from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Send Email.
4
Press the Next (
5
Enter the recipient’s email address using Direct Input or Email List.
6
If necessary, customize the scan settings including original size, scan color, scan format,
duplex, and image quality by using Options.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
) button.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the e-mail.
149
Scanning and Sending to SMB Server
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file. You need to
set the SMB server setting from the Embedded Web Service before following the next steps.
See "Setting up an SMB server".
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Scan from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select SMB.
4
Press the Next (
5
Show the SMB server list you entered in the Embedded Web Service. Select the
destination SMB server.
) button.
You can select up to five destinations.
6
If necessary, customize the scan settings including original size, scan color, scan format,
duplex, and image quality by using Options.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server.
150
Scanning and Sending to FTP Server
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the scanned file. You need to
set the FTP server setting from the Embedded Web Service before following the next steps.
See "Setting up an FTP server"
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Scan from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select FTP.
4
Press the Next (
5
Show the FTP server list you entered in the Embedded Web Service. Select the
destination FTP server.
) button.
You can select up to five destinations.
6
If necessary, customize the scan settings including original size, scan color, scan format,
duplex, and image quality by using Options.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server.
151
Scanning and Sending Custom Email
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Scan from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Custom Email.
4
Press the Next (
5
Press each tab to enter the email address or title.
) button.
•
From: Sender's address. Touch From and then use the pop up keyboard to enter your
email addresses.
•
To/Cc/Bcc: Enter the recipient’s email address using Direct Input or Email List.
•
Subject: Title of the email.
6
If necessary, customize the scan settings including original size, scan color, scan format,
duplex, and image quality by using Options.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
Scanning is started.
152
Scan to Fax Server
Fax server will decipher the fax/e-mail data to send out the job. The e-mail is automatically
processed by fax server and sent to the given recipient.
First, the printer sends the scanned data to the fax server. Then, the fax server uses PSTN to
send a fax/e-mail data to recipient.
To use fax server features as scan to e-mail, you first need to configure the network settings.
See "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" for network parameters.
1
Press Scan from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select Fax Server.
3
Press the Next (
4
Enter the remote fax phone number using Direct Input or Fax List.
5
If necessary, customize the scan settings including original size, scan color, scan format,
duplex, and image quality by using Options.
6
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
) button.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the fax.
153
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver
Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard
components provided by Microsoft Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/7 and works
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver enables you to
scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/7.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Click Start
Cameras.
Control Panel
For Windows Vista, click Start
and Cameras.
Printers and Other Hardware
Control Panel
Scanners and
Hardware and Sound
Scanners
3
Double click your scanner icon. The Scanners and Camera Wizard launches.
For Windows 7, click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes
Start Scan. New Scan application appears.
4
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences will
affect the picture.
5
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.
6
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.
NOTE: SmarThru Office built-in OCR software can copy text from scanned documents to any text
editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR process requires textual images
scanned at 150 to 600 dpi. 300 dpi or 600 dpi is recommended for graphics.
154
Scanning to the USB Memory
You can scan a document and save the scanned image on the USB memory. There are two ways
of doing this: you can scan to the USB Memory using the default settings, or you can manually
select your own settings.
About USB Memory
USB memory is available with various memory capacities to give you enough space to store
documents, presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution photographs, or
whatever other files you want to take with you.
You can do the following features using an optional USB memory:
•
•
•
Scan documents and save them on the USB Memory.
Format the USB Memory.
Check the available memory space.
CAUTION: If your USB memory has certain features, such as security settings and password
settings, your printer may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see the
User’s Guide which came with your USB memory key.
Plugging in a USB memory key
The USB memory port on the front of your printer is designed for USB V1.1 and USB V2.0
memory. You must use only a USB memory key whose connector style is A Plug Type.
Use only the metal/shielded
USB memory key.
Insert a USB memory key into the USB memory port on the front of your printer.
CAUTION: Do not remove the USB memory key during scanning operation. This may damage your printer.
155
Scanning Using the Default Settings
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Press Scan from the home screen.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select USB.
5
Press the Next (
6
If necessary, customize the scan settings including original size, scan color, scan format,
duplex, and image quality by using Options.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
) button.
Your printer begins scanning the document and saves it to your USB memory.
8
156
After printing is completed, you can remove the USB memory device from the machine.
Changing the Scan Feature Settings
The following table shows the options you can select.
Original Type
Original Size
Resolution
Color
Format
Duplex
Text,
Text & Photo,
Photo
Letter, A4,
Executive,
Statement, JIS
B5, A5, A6
100, 200,
300, 600
Color,
Gray,
Mono
JPEG, BMP, TIFF,
PDF, Single-TIFF,
Multi-TIFF
Off, Short
Edge, Long
Edge
NOTE: 600 dpi resolution is available in color scanning only when additional memory DIMM is
installed.
1
Press Scan from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select USB.
3
Press the Next (
4
Click Options to adjust the settings for each scan.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5
) button.
Original Type: Sets the original’s type.
Original Size: Sets the image size.
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
Scan Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option, you cannot select JPEG
in Scan Format.
Scan Format: You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job. If
you select Mono in Scan Format, do not select JPEG. Depending on the selected scan
type, this option may not appear.
Scan Duplex: This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned
are two-sided.
File Name: Names a file before you scan a document.
File Policy: You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the
scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name when you entered a
new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
157
Managing the USB Memory
You can delete image files stored in the USB memory one by one or all at once by formatting
the memory.
Deleting an Image File
To delete an image file that you scanned and saved on your USB memory stick.
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press the
button from the home screen.
2
Press File Manage.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press
6
Press
mark next to the file you want to delete.
when the confirmation window appears.
to go to the upper menu.
until return to the Standby mode.
Formatting the USB Memory
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press the
158
button from the home screen.
2
Press File Manage.
3
Press Options
4
Press
when the confirmation window appears.
5
Press
until return to the Standby mode.
Format.
Printing from the USB Memory Key
You can print files stored in the USB memory key. TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN file
formats are supported.
NOTE: PDF files generated by this printer, and TIFF 6.0 files are available.
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press the
button from the home screen.
2
Press Print From.
3
Press the up/down arrows to select the folder or file you want.
4
If you selected a file in step 3, go to the next step.
If you selected a folder, press left/right arrows to select the file you want to print.
5
Press Options and select the appropriate option.
6
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
Printing is started.
7
After printing is completed, you can remove the USB memory device from the machine.
Viewing the USB Memory Status
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents.
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press the
2
button from the home screen.
Press Show Space.
The available memory space appears on the display.
3
Press
4
Press
to go to the upper menu.
until return to the Standby mode.
159
Scan to Email Setup
To use e-mail features such as Scanning to E-mail and Fax Forward to E-mail addresses, you
first need to configure the network settings and set up your e-mail account. See "Setting Up a
Network-connected Printer" for network parameters.
Setting up the Email Account
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the menu item you want.
5
If necessary, press the left/right arrows until the submenu item you want appears.
6
Enter the required information or select the desired status.
7
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Available Options for Email Account Setup
Option
SMTP
Servera
User Setup
Send to Self
Description
You can set the printer to access an SMTP server for outgoing mail.
• SMTP Server: Enables you to enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP
server. This can be given in dotted decimal notation or as a domain name. (e.g.
111. 222. 333. 444 or smtp.xyz.com)
• Max Mail Size: Enables you to specify the maximum size of mail which can be
sent.
You can register an user to use an email account.
• Log Off Reminder: You can set whether the printer reminds an authorized user
about log off each time an email transmission is completed.
• User Lists: You can set add user or delete user.
–
Add Users: Enables you to add a user's login name, register login ID, and
password. Login ID and password is needed when using the email.
–
Delete Users: Enables you to delete an authorized user.
You can set whether or not your outgoing emails are sent to your email account.
Default To Address You can set the default e-mail address that appears on the display.
160
Default From
You can set the default e-mail address.
Default Subject
You can set the default subject in your emails.
Option
Description
Email Forward
You can set the printer to forward all of the outgoing or incoming faxes to
specified e-mail addresses. See "Fax Forward to E-mail addresses".
Control Access
You can protect the Email Setup feature with a passcode.
a
If you want to use the host name in SMTP server, you must set the DNS server first.
Scanning by a network connection
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up network parameters correctly, you
can scan and send images over the network.
Preparing for network scanning
Before using your machine’s network scanning features, you need to configure the following
settings depending on your scan destination:
•
Registering as an authorized user for scanning to Email
•
Setting up SMTP server for scanning to Email
User authentication for network scanning
To send an email, or Network, you need to register local or network authorized users using
Embedded Web Service.
•
If user authentication is activated, only authorized users in local or server DB (LDAP,
Kerberos) can send scan data to network (Email, Network) using the machine.
•
To use user authentication for network scanning, you need to register network or local
authentication configuration using Embedded Web Service.
•
User authentication has 3 types as no authentication (Default), network authentication
and local Authentication.
Registering authorized users
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Email Settings
3
Select User Authentication.
4
Enter your auth ID, password.
Authentication.
You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine when you scanning
to email from the control panel.
5
Click Submit.
161
Setting up an e-mail account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up network parameters
using Embedded Web Service.
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Email Settings
3
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
SMTP Server Setup.
The default port number is 25.
4
Put a check mark in SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication.
5
Enter your SMTP Server Login Name, SMTP Server Password, SMTP Server
Connection Timeout, and Maximun Message Size.
6
Click Submit.
Setting up an SMB server
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up network parameters
using Embedded Web Service.
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Scan to Server Settings
3
Click Add.
4
Select the index number, from 1 to 20.
5
Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server List entry. This name
will be displayed on your machine.
6
Select IP Address or Host Name.
7
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
8
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
SMB Settings
Sever List.
The default port number is 139.
9
162
Enter the Share name of the server.
10
Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit unauthorized persons to access
the SMB server. This box is unchecked by default.
11
Enter the login name and password.
12
Enter the domain name of the SMB server.
13
Enter the Scan File Folder under shared folder for storing the scanned image.
14
Click Apply.
Setting up an FTP server
To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP servers using
Embedded Web Service.
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Scan to Server Settings
3
Click Add.
4
Select the index number, from 1 to 20.
5
Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server List entry. This name
will be displayed on your machine.
6
Select IP Address or Host Name.
7
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
8
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
FTP Settings
Sever List
The default port number is 21.
9
Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit unauthorized persons to access
the FTP server. This box is unchecked by default.
10
Enter the login name and password.
11
Enter the domain name of the FTP server.
12
Enter the Scan File Folder under FTP directory for saving the scanned image.
13
Click Apply.
Network authorized user by LDAP
You can use not only local addresses stored in your machine's memory but also ones in the
LDAP server. To use the global addresses, configure the LDAP server first via Embedded Web
Service as following:
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Email Settings
3
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
4
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
LDAP Server Setup.
The default port number is 389.
5
Enter Search Root Directory. The top search level of the LDAP directory tree.
6
Enter your Login Name, Password, Maximun Number of Search Results, and Search
Timeout.
See "Email Settings" for network parameters.
. NOTE: LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server in case LDAP server has no data to
reply of query and LDAP server has any referral server.
7
Click Submit.
163
Available Options for LDAP Server
Option
LDAP Server
Setup
LDAP Server and
Port
Description
Specifies the LDAP server address in IP address format of
"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name up to 63 characters.
And specifies the LDAP server port number up to 15
alphanumeric characters.
Secure LDAP
Connection
Support a method of securing LDAP communication via SSL.
Search Root
Directory
Enter the top search level of the LDAP directory tree.
Authentication
method
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing LDAP server.
Append Root to
Base DN
Check if it is needed to append base DN at the end of the user
DN.
Login Name
Specifies the LDAP account user name.Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@)
can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
Password
Specifies the LDAP account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Maximum Number '0' means that the number of LDAP search results does not have
of Search Results limit. It shall be 5 ~ 100 entries.
164
Search Timeout
Sets the timeout period from 5 to 100 seconds.
LDAP Referral
Check if it is necessary.
Search Name
Order
• Choose Common Name if user id has "cn=<user name>"
form.
• Choose Email Address if user id has "mail=<user name>"
form.
• Choose Surname Given Name otherwise.
Setting up an e-mail alert
To configure detailed settings for email alert.
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Email Settings → Email Alert Setup.
3
Enter the item you want appears.
4
Click Submit.
NOTE: This feature is available only when DNS server is correctly set up.
Available Options for Email Alert
Option
Email Alert
Setup
Description
IP Address or Host Sets the IP address or Host name.
Name
Primary SMTP
Gateway
Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port
Number
Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be 25 or between
5000 and 65535.
Enable Primary
SMTP Auth
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
Primary SMTP
Account Name
Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@)
can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
Primary SMTP
Account Password
Specifies the SMTP account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Primary From
Sender’s e-mail address registered in the Primary server.
SMTP Timeout
Sets the timeout period from 30 to 120 seconds.
Reply Address
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail
Alert.
Secure Email
Connection with
SSL/TLS
Support a method of securing SMTP communication via
SSL/TSL.
165
Option
Setup POP3
before SMTP
POP3 Server and
Porta
Description
Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of
"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name up to 63 characters.
And specifies the POP3 server port number up to 15
alphanumeric characters.
POP3 User Namea Specifies the POP3 account user name.Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@)
can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
Email Alert
Setup
POP3 User
Passworda
Specifies the POP3 account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Email List 1~2
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature
up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Select Alerts for
List 1
• Supply Alert: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert
for consumables.
• Paper Handling Alert: Select the check box to receive an
E-Mail Alert for paper handling.
Select Alerts for
List 2
• Supply Alert: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert
for consumables.
• Paper Handling Alert: Select the check box to receive an
E-Mail Alert for paper handling.
• Toner Low: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
toner low.
• Toner Almost Empty: Select the check box to receive an
E-Mail Alert for toner almost empty.
• Toner Empty: Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert
for toner empty.
a Available when SMTP requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication is selected.
166
Setting up Address Book
You can set up your Address Book with the email addresses that you use frequently. You can
then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the name you have assigned in the
Address Book.
Registering local email numbers
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently via Embedded Web
Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers
assigned to them in Address Book.
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Email Settings → Address Book.
3
Click Local Address Book.
4
Click Add.
5
Select a location number and enter the user name and e-mail address you want.
6
Click Submit.
NOTE: You can also click Import and obtain your address book from your computer.
Adding an E-mail Address to Address Book
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Email List
5
Press Individual.
6
Press the
7
Enter the name and e-mail address in the each field with the pop up keyboard. And then
enter the speed dial using keypad.
8
Press
9
Press
10
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
View List.
button
Add.
to go to the upper menu.
or
when the confirmation window appears.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Editing or Deleting an E-mail Address
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
) button.
167
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Email List
5
Press Individual.
6
To delete the selected address, press the
delete.
View List.
mark next to the e-mail address you want to
OR
To edit the e-mail address, press the name or e-mail address and edit the name or e-mail
address using the keyboard.
7
Press
or
when the confirmation window appears.
8
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Group Numbers
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can group these
destinations and set them under a group dial location. This enables you to use a group dial
number setting to send a document to all destinations in the group. You can set up to 50 (1
through 50) group dial numbers.
Configuring group email numbers
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently via Embedded Web
Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers
assigned to them in Address Book.
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to access the web
site of your machine.
2
Click Email Settings → Address Book.
3
Click Group Address Book.
4
Click Add.
5
Select a group number and enter the group name you want.
6
Select local email numbers that will be included in the group.
7
Click Submit.
Assigning Email Addresses to a Group Number
168
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
) button.
4
Press Email List
View List.
5
Press Group.
6
Press the
7
Enter Name in the field with the pop up keyboard and select Speed Dial using the
left/right arrows or keypad.
8
Press the Group Members
9
Select an entry using the up/down arrows from e-mail address list.
Add.
button
10
Press
11
Press
12
Press the home icon (
Email List.
until confirmation window appears.
or
.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Deleting a Group Number
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Email List
5
Press Group.
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the home icon (
) button.
View List.
mark next to the group number you want to delete.
or
when the confirmation window appears.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Editing Group Numbers
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Email List
5
Press Group.
6
Press the up/down arrows to select the e-mail address(es) you want to edit.
) button.
View List.
OR
Press the
button
stored in the group.
Search. Search the group or number name which is currently
7
Press the Name and edit the group name using the keyboard.
8
Press Group Members
Email List.
169
9
10
To add the e-mail address, press the up/down arrows to select the e-mail address you
wand add.
To delete the e-mail address, press the
mark next to the e-mail address you want to
delete.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Printing Address Book
You can check your email address book list by printing it on the paper.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Email List
) button.
Print.
A list showing your e-mail address and group e-mail address prints out.
Changing Default Settings
You can set up default scan settings.
170
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press Default Setting.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select Scan Defaults.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select to access the option.
6
Press the left/right arrows to select you want option,
7
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Networking
About Sharing the Printer on a Network
Setting Up the Locally Shared Printer
Setting Up a Network-connected Printer
About Sharing the Printer on a Network
Locally-shared Printer
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer, which is called the “host
computer” on the network. The printer can then be shared by other users on the network
through a Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Server 2008, Vista, Windows 7, or Server 2008 R2
network printer connection.
Wired Network-connected Printer
Your printer has a built-in network interface. For details, see "Connecting the printer to the
Network".
Printing Across a Network
Whether the printer is locally connected or network-connected, you need to install the Dell
2355dn Laser MFP software on each computer that prints documents using the printer.
Setting Up the Locally Shared Printer
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer, which is called the “host
computer,” on the network. Your printer can be shared by other users on the network through a
Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Server 2008, or Vista network printer connection.
In Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/ 7/ Server 2008 R2
NOTE: This process assumes that drivers have already been installed.
Share the Printer
1
For Windows 2000, click the Start button → Settings → Printer.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the Start button and point to Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the Start button and click Control Panel →
Hardware and Sound → Printers.
For Windows 7, Click the Start button and click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound
→ Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, click the Start button and click Control Panel →
Hardware → Devices and Printers.
172
2
Double-click your printer icon.
3
Click the Printer menu and point to Sharing.
4
If you are using Windows Vista, you may be prompted to change the sharing options
before you can continue. Press the Change Sharing Options button, and the press
Continue on the next dialog box.
5
For Windows 2000, check the Shared As box.
For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/ 7 / Server 2008 R2, check the Share this
printer box.
6
Fill in the Share Name field.
7
Click Additional Drivers, and select the operating systems of all network clients printing
to this printer.
8
Click OK.
If you are missing files, you are prompted to insert the server operating system CD.
9
a
Insert the Software and Documentation CD, ensure that the drive letter is correct
for your CD-ROM drive, and then click OK.
b
If you are using Windows Vista: Brows to a client computer running the operating
system, and then click OK. If you are using any other Windows version: Insert the
operating system CD, ensure that the drive letter is correct for your CD-ROM drive,
and then click OK.
Click Close.
To check that the printer was successfully shared:
•
Make sure the printer object in the Printers folder shows it is shared. For example, in
Windows 2000, a hand is shown underneath the printer icon.
•
Browse My Network Places or Network Neighborhood. Find the host name of the server,
and look for the shared name you assigned to the printer.
Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients using the point
and print method or the Peer-to-Peer method.
173
Install the Shared Printer on Client Computers
Point and Print
This method is the best use of system resources. The print server handles driver modifications
and print job processing. This lets network clients return to their programs much faster.
If you use the Point and Print method, a subset of driver information is copied from the print
server to the client computer. This is just enough information to send a print job to the printer.
1
Right-click the Start button and point to Explore.
2
Double-click My Network Places or Network Neighborhood.
3
Double-click the host name of the printer server computer.
4
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Install or Connect.
Wait for the driver information to copy from the print server computer to the client
computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers folder. The time this
takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
5
Close My Network Places or Network Neighborhood.
6
Print a test page to verify print installation.
When a test page prints successfully, printer installation is complete. See "To print a test
page:".
Peer-to-Peer
If you use the Peer-to-Peer method, the printer driver is fully installed on each client computer.
Network clients retain control of driver modifications. The client computer handles the print
job processing.
1
For Windows 2000, click the Start button → Settings → Printer.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the Start button and point to Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the Start button and click Control Panel →
Hardware and Sound → Printers.
For Windows 7, click the Start button and click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound
→ Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, click the Start button and click Control Panel →
Hardware → Devices and Printers.
174
2
Click Add Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3
Click A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer.
4
Select the network printer from the Shared printers list. If the printer is not listed, type
the path of the printer in the text box.
For example: \\<print server host name>\<shared printer name>
The print server host name is the name of the print server computer that identifies it to
the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the print server
installation process.
5
Click OK.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver
is available, then you will need to provide a path to available drivers
6
Select whether you want this printer to be the default printer for the client, and then
click Finish.
7
Print a test page to verify printer installation.
When a test page prints successfully, printer installation is complete.
To print a test page:
1
For Windows 2000, click the Start button → Settings → Printer.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the Start button and point to Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the Start button and click Control Panel →
Hardware and Sound → Printers.
For Windows 7, click the Start button and click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound
→ Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, click the Start button and click Control Panel →
Hardware → Devices and Printers
2
Double-click your printer icon.
3
Click the File menu and point to Properties.
4
Click the General tab, and select Print Test Page.
175
Setting Up a Network-connected Printer
You must set up the network protocols on the printer to use it as your network printer.
Protocols can be set up by the following two methods:
1 Via Network Administration Programs
You can configure your printer’s print server settings and manage it via the following programs:
•
Set IP Address Utility: A utility program allowing you to find your network printer and
manually configure the addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
•
Embedded Web Service: A web server embedded to your network print server, which
allows you to:
Configure the network parameters necessary for the printer to connect to various network
environments.
2 Via the Operator Panel
You can configure the basic network parameters through the printer’s operator panel. Use the
printer operator panel to do the following:
•
Print a Network Configuration Page
•
Configure TCP/IP
•
Configure EtherTalk
•
Configure a Wireless network
Configuring Network Parameters on the Operator Panel
Item
Requirements
Network Interface
• 10/100 Base-TX
• 802.11 b/g Wireless LAN (Optional)
Network Operating System • Windows: WinNT4.0/2000/XP(32/64bits)/Vista(32/64bits)/2003
Server(32/64bits)/2008 Server(32/64bits)/7/ Server 2008 R2
• Novell NetWare NDPS services via TCP/IP & IPP on 5.x, 6.x,
• Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6
• Various Linux OS
• UNIX(TBD, SUN 8,9,10, HP-UX 11i, IBM AIX 5.2, 5.3)
• Citrix, Windows Terminal Server, SAP
176
Item
Requirements
Network Protocols
TCP/IPv4, IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, 9100, LPR, SNMP, HTTP, IPSec),
EtherTalk, Novell NetWare NDPS services via TCP/IP & IPP on 5.x, 6.x,
DHCP, BOOTP, SLP, SSDP, Bonjour (Rendezvous), DDNS, WINS, TCP
(Port 2000), LPR (Port 515), Raw (Port 9100), SNMPv1/2/3, HTTP,
Telnet, SMTP (E-mail Notification)
Dynamic Addressing Server DHCP, BOOTP
Printing a Network Configuration Page
The Network Configuration page shows how the network interface card on your printer is
configured. The default settings are suitable for most applications.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Reports.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Network Settings.
) button.
The Network Configuration page prints out.
Setting Network Protocols
When you first install and power up the printer, all supported network protocols are enabled. If
a network protocol is enabled, the printer may actively transmit on the network even when the
protocol is not in use. This may slightly increase network traffic. To eliminate unnecessary
traffic, you may disable unused protocols.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Network Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows until you see the desired protocol
5
If you selected Ethernet Speed, select a network speed.
) button.
If you selected TCP/IP (IPv4) or TCP/IP (IPv6), assign a TCP/IP address. For details,
see "Configuring TCP/IP".
If you selected EtheTalk.
a
Press Activate.
b
Press the left/right arrows to change the setting to On (enable) or Off (disable).
NOTE: When you set EtheTalk, you must restart your machine to apply new settings.
6
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
177
Configuring TCP/IP
•
Static Addressing: TCP/IP address is assigned manually by the system administrator.
•
Dynamic Addressing BOOTP/DHCP (default): TCP/IP address is assigned automatically
by a DHCP or BOOTP server on your network.
NOTE: Only the system administrator can set the IP address forTCP/IP (IPv6).
Setting TCP/IP
To enter the TCP/IP setting from your printer’s operator panel, take the following steps:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Network Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows until you see the desired protocol
) button.
If you selected TCP/IP (IPv4).
a
Press IPv4 Activate.
b
Press the left/right arrows to change the setting to On (enable) or Off (disable).
If you selected TCP/IP (IPv6).
5
a
Press IPv6 Activate.
b
Press the left/right arrows to change the setting to On (enable) or Off (disable).
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Static Addressing
To enter the TCP/IP address from your printer’s operator panel, take the following steps:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Network Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select TCP/IP (IPv4).
5
Press the up/down arrows to select Set IP Address.
6
Select Configuration and press the left/right arrows to select Manual.
7
Select the IP Address menu.
) button.
An IP address consists of 4 bytes.
8
Press 1st byte area and enter the numbers using the keypad.
Enter the rest of the bytes in the same way.
9
Enter other parameters, such as the Subnet Mask or Gateway.
10
178
After entering all parameters, press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Dynamic Addressing (BOOTP/DHCP)
To assign the TCP/IP address automatically using a DHCP or BOOTP server on your network.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Network Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select TCP/IP (IPv4).
5
Press the up/down arrows to select Set IP Address.
6
Select Configuration and press the left/right arrows to select DHCP.
) button.
To assign the address from the BOOTP server, press the left/right arrows to select
BOOTP.
Restoring the Network Configuration
You can return the network configuration to its default settings.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Network Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Clear Settings.
5
Press
6
Power the printer off and back on or reset the network interface card.
) button.
when the confirmation window appears.
Setting for Special Solutions
When you use a specific printing solution such as iPrint Notification, you have to turn on
this feature. The interpretation of printer status information may defer to the printing solution
system. If the printer’s status on your printing solution is different from the status on your
printer, try to set this option.
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Network Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select iPrint Notification.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the client operating system.
6
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
•
Win(XP,2K,2003)
•
Windows Vista
•
Winows 7
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
179
180
Faxing
Setting the Printer ID
Setting the Time and Date
Setting Daylight Savings Time
Changing the Clock Mode
Setting Sounds
Toll Save Mode
Setting up the Fax System
Sending a Fax
Receiving a Fax
Automatic Dialing
Other Ways to Fax
Additional Features
Fax Data Back-up
Setting the Printer ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send.
The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be
printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Machine ID.
5
Enter the Fax and ID field using the pop-up keyboard.
For details on how to use the keyboard to enter alphanumeric characters, see
"Understanding the Keyboard".
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting the Time and Date
The time and date are printed on all faxes.
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.
To set the time and date:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Date & Time.
5
Enter Date and Time each using the up/down arrows.
) button.
Day= 01 ~ 31
Month= 01 ~ 12
Year= 2000 ~ 2099
Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
Minute= 00 ~ 59
You can also use the up/down arrows to move the cursor under the digit you want to
correct and enter a new number.
6
182
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Setting Daylight Savings Time
If your country switches to Daylight Savings Time each year, use this procedure to
automatically switch to Daylight Savings Time and to Standard time.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Day Light Saving.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select Manual.
6
Enter the Start Time and End Time each using the up/down arrows.
7
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Changing the Clock Mode
You can set your printer to display the current time using either the 12-hours or the 24-hours
format.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Clock Mode.
) button.
The printer display the clock mode that is currently set.
5
Press the left/right arrows to select the other mode.
6
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
183
Setting Sounds
Speaker, Ringer, Dial Tone, Fault, Conflict, and Selection
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Sound & Volume.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select the appropriate option you want.
6
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
•
Speaker: Turns On or Off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker,
such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which means
Comm., the speaker is on until the remote machine answers.
•
Ringer: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select Off, Low,
Med, and High.
•
Dial Tone: Adjusts the dial tone volume. For the dial tone volume, you can select
1-7.
•
Fault: Adjusts the ‘error occurs’ volume. For the error volume, you can select Off,
Low, Med, and High.
•
Conflict: Adjusts the conflict volume. For the error volume, you can select Off, Low,
Med, and High.
•
Selection: You can set the selection volume for when pressing the button, you can
select Off, Low, Med, and High.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Toll Save Mode
The Toll Save mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified
time in order to take advantage of lower long distance rates.
To turn the Toll Save mode on:
184
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Fax Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Toll Save.
5
Press the left/right arrows to display On.
6
Select the Start Time and End Time each using the up/down arrows.
) button.
7
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Once Toll Save mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its
memory and sends them at the programmed time.
To turn Toll Save mode off, follow steps 1 and 5 in "Toll Save Mode" and then press the
left/right arrows until Off displays.
Setting up the Fax System
Changing the Fax Setup Options
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Default Setting.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the Fax Default
5
Press the up/down arrows to display the desired menu item.
6
Use the left/right arrows to find the status to enter the value for the option you have
selected.
7
Press the home icon (
) button.
Common.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Available Fax Defaults Options
You can use the following setup options for configuring the fax system:
Option
Description
Contrast
You can select the default contrast value to fax your documents normal,
lighter, or darker.
Send Quality
You can select the default resolution setting to Standard, Fine, Super Fine,
Photo Fax, or Color Fax.
Original Type
You can select the type of original you are faxing. This will give you a better
fax.
Original Size
You can select the original document type to enhance the quality of a
document.
Tone / Pulse
You can set the dial mode for your machine to either tone dialing or pulse
dialing.
Ring to Answer
You can specify the number of times the printer rings, 1-7, before answering
an incoming call.
185
Option
Description
Receive Mode
You can select the default fax receiving mode.
• Fax mode (automatic receive mode): The printer answers an incoming call
and automatically goes into receive mode. The number of rings before the
printer answers can be set in the Ring to Answer option. If the user memory
is full, the printer can no longer receive any incoming fax. Secure free
memory to resume by canceling Priority Send or printing received faxes.
• Tel mode (manual receive mode): Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial
and then Start.
• Ans/Fax mode: The printer can share one telephone line with an answering
machine. In this mode, the printer may monitor the fax signal and pick up
the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is
serial, this mode is not available.
• DRPD mode: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)
option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by
the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax
setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Redial Delay
Your printer can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy.
Intervals from 1-15 minutes can be entered.
Redial Attempt
You can specify the number of redial attempts, 0-13.
MSG Confirm
You can set your printer to print a report showing whether the transmission
was successful, how many pages were sent, and more. The available options
are On, Off and On-Error, which prints only when a transmission is not
successful.
Auto Report
A report with detailed information about the previous 50 communications
operations, including time and dates. The available options are On or Off.
Auto Reduction
When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper loaded in the
paper tray, the printer can reduce the size of the document to fit the size of
paper loaded in the printer. Select On if you want to automatically reduce the
incoming document.
With this feature set to Off, the printer cannot reduce the document to fit
onto one page. The document is divided and printed in actual size on two or
more pages.
186
Option
Description
Discard Size
When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper installed in
your printer, you can set the printer to discard any excess at the bottom of the
page. If the received page is outside the margin you set, it will print on two
sheets of paper at the actual size.
When the document is within the margin and the Auto Reduction feature is
turned on, the printer reduces the document to fit it onto the appropriate
sized paper and discarding does not occur. If the Auto Reduction feature is
turned off or fails, the data within the margin will be discarded. Settings
range from 0-30 mm.
Receive Code
The Receive Code enables you to initiate fax reception from an extension
phone plugged into the extension telephone socket( ) on the back of the
printer. If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the
Receive Code. The Receive Code is preset to *9* at the factory. Settings
range from 0-9. See "Receiving Manually Using an Extension Telephone" for
more information about using the code.
DRPD Mode
You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)
feature which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. In this menu, you can set the printer to
recognize the ring patterns to answer. For details about this feature, see
"Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode".
Tray
You can set the tray that you want to use for a received fax printing job.
Print Duplex
You can set the machine to print received faxes on both sides of paper. The
available options are Off, Long Edge, and Short Edge.
Testing Fax line connection
1
Press Setup
Maintenance from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press Fax Line Test.
) button.
The printer display the test result.
If the fax line connection test has failed, check the telephone line cord connection or
contact your telephone service provider.
NOTE: If test pass - you can start using the Fax functionality
If test fail - Need to direct them to the troubleshooting section for fax.
187
Sending a Fax
Adjusting the Document Contrast
Use the Contrast setting to fax your documents lighter or darker.
1
Press Fax from the home screen.
2
Press the Options or Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Contrast.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the contrast mode you want.
) button.
•
Lighter works well with dark print.
•
Normal works well with standard typed or printed documents.
•
Darker works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Adjusting the Document Resolution
Use the Quality setting to improve the output quality of the original or to scan photographs.
1
Press Fax from the home screen.
2
Press the Options or Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Send Quality.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the quality mode you want.
) button.
The document types recommended for the resolution settings are described in the table below.
Mode
Recommended for:
Standard
Documents with normal sized characters.
Fine
Documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine
Documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is
enabled only if the remote printer also supports the Super Fine
resolution. See the notes below.
Photo Fax
Documents containing shades of gray or photographs.
Color Fax
Documents with colors. Sending a color fax is enabled only if the remote
printer supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually. In
this mode, the memory transmission is not available.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in Super Fine resolution will transmit at the highest resolution supported by
the receiving device.
188
Sending a Fax Manually
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Fax
Manual Send from the home screen.
3
Press the Next (
4
Press the Direct Input or Fax List.
5
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
6
Enter the remote fax phone number using the pop-up keyboard.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
8
When the document is loaded from the document glass, the display shows Another
Page? on the screen after the document is scanned into the memory. If you have
additional pages, remove the scanned page and load the next page from the glass and
select
. Repeat as necessary.
) button.
After all of the pages are scanned, select
9
when the display shows Another Page?
When the printer establishes contact with the receiving machine, it dials the number
and sends the fax.
NOTE: Press
to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
189
Sending a Fax Automatically
You need to set fax phone number from the Setup
Machine Setup
Next (
Default Setting
Fax Default
Auto Send before following the next steps.
1
)
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Fax
Auto Send from the home screen.
3
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
4
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
NOTE: Press
190
to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
Sending a Fax Directly
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Fax from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select On Hook Dial.
4
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
5
Press On Hook (
6
Enter the remote fax machine’s fax number using the keypad.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
NOTE: Press
).
to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns
to Standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display. For a
listing of error messages and their meanings, see "Clearing LCD Error Messages".
If you receive an error message, press
again.
to clear the message and try to send the document
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax
transmission. For further details, see the MSG Confirm item in "Available Fax Defaults
Options".
191
Automatic Redialing
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the
machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on the country's factory
default setting.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available
Fax Defaults Options".
Redialing fax number
When you want to redial the last fax number you have sent, you can use this feature.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast".
2
Press Fax from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Redial.
4
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
5
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
6
When the printer establishes contact with the receiving machine, it dials the number
and sends the fax.
Receiving a Fax
NOTE: The Dell 2355dn Laser MFP can print mono faxes only. If a color formatted fax is received,
the data will be automatically changed to mono fax.
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the extension telephone socket
(
) on the back of your printer.
When the memory is full, the printer can no longer receive any incoming fax. Secure free
memory to resume by canceling Priority Send or printing received faxes.
192
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing,
faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-, A4-, or Legal-sized paper.
For details about loading paper, see "Loading Paper". For details about setting the paper type
and size in the tray, see "Setting the Paper Type" and "Setting the Paper Size".
Receiving Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
When you receive a fax, the printer answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax.
To change the number of rings, see "Available Fax Defaults Options".
If you want to adjust the ringer volume, see "Setting Sounds".
Receiving Manually in the Tel Mode
You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the extension phone and then pressing the
remote receive code (see "Receive Code"), or by accessing Fax → On Hook Dial when the bell
is ringing (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote printer) and then pressing Start ( )
on the operator panel.
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to Standby mode when the reception is
completed.
Receiving Automatically in the Ans/Fax Mode
If you are using an answering machine in this mode, attach it to the extension telephone
socket ( ) on the back of your printer.
If your printer does not detect a fax tone, the answering machine will take the call. If your
printer detects a fax tone, it automatically initiates reception of the fax.
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and your answering machine is switched off, or
no answering machine is connected to your machine, your printer may automatically go into Fax
mode after a predefined number of rings.
Receiving Manually Using an Extension Telephone
This features works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the
extension telephone socket ( ) on the back of your printer. You can receive a fax from
someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without having to go to the fax
machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the keys *9* (star
nine star) on the extension telephone.
193
The printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote printer, try
pressing *9* once again.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last asterisks are fixed,
but you can change the middle number to whatever you choose. The code should be one digit.
For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Defaults Options".
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode
“Distinctive Ring” is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number someone
uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns, available in combinations of long
and short ringing sounds.
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax machine can “learn” the ring
pattern you designate to be answered by the FAX machine. This ringing pattern may be
recognized and answered as a FAX call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the extension telephone socket ( )
on the back of your printer. You can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection at any time.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection, you may need another telephone line at your location, dial your FAX number from
another line.
To set up the DRPD mode:
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Default Setting.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the Fax Default
5
Press the up/down arrows to select DRPD Mode.
6
Press the left/right arrows to select Set.
7
Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to place the call from a
fax machine.
8
When your printer begins to ring, do not answer the call. The printer requires several
rings to learn the pattern.
9
When the printer completes learning, the displays shows Complete DRPD Setup.
10
194
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
Press the home icon (
Common.
) to return to the Standby mode.
When the DRPD feature is set up, the DRPD option is available in the Receive Mode menu.
To receive faxes in the DRPD mode, you need to set the menu to DRPD; see "Available Fax
Defaults Options".
NOTE: DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect the printer to
another telephone line.
NOTE: After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the printer answers
with a fax tone. Then call a different number assigned to that same line to ensure the call is
forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the extension telephone
socket ( ) on the back of the printer.
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while performing other tasks. If
you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer
stores incoming faxes in the memory. As soon as you finish copying, printing, or resupply the
consumables, the printer automatically prints the fax.
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 400 frequently dialed numbers in one, two or three-digit speed dial
locations (0-399).
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Fax List
5
Press Individual.
6
Press the
7
Enter the name and phone number in the each field with the pop up keyboard. And then
enter the speed dial using keypad.
8
Press
9
Press
10
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
View List.
button
Add.
to go to the upper menu.
or
when the confirmation window appears.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
195
Editing Speed Dial Numbers
You can edit a specific speed dial number.
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Fax List
5
Press Individual.
6
Press the up/down arrows to select the speed dial number you want to edit.
7
Enter the name and phone number in the each field with the pop up keyboard.
8
Press
9
Press
10
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
View List.
to go to the upper menu.
or
when the confirmation window appears.
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Sending a Fax using a Speed Number
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
196
2
Press Fax from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Speed Dial Send.
4
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
5
Press the Next (
) button.
6
Press the up/down arrows to select the speed dial number you want.
OR
Press the
button
Search. Searches the fax number which currently stored in
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter name.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
8
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display asks if you want to
send another page. Select
to add more documents or
to begin sending the
fax immediately.
9
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document
is sent when the remote fax machine answers.
Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of
these destinations and set them under a one, two or three-digit group dial locations. This
enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the same document to all the
destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.
Setting Group Dial
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Fax List
5
Press Group.
6
Press the
7
Enter Name in the field with the pop up keyboard and select Group Dial using the
left/right arrows or keypad.
8
Press Group Members
9
Select an entry using the up/down arrows from speed dial list.
) button.
View List
button
10
Press
11
Press
12
Press the home icon (
Add.
Fax List.
until confirmation window appears.
or
.
) to return to the Standby mode.
197
Editing Group Dial Numbers
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the
selected group.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Fax List
5
Press Group.
6
Press the up/down arrows to select the group dial number you want to edit.
) button.
View List
OR
Press the
button
stored in the group.
Search. Search the group or number name which is currently
7
Press the Name and edit the group name using the keyboard.
8
Press Group Members
9
To add the speed dial number, press the up/down arrows to select the speed dial you want
add.
Fax List.
To delete the speed dial number, select the speed dial you want delete and press
10
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Sending a Fax using a Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
198
2
Press Fax from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Group Dial Send.
.
4
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
5
Press the Next (
6
Press the up/down arrows to select the group dial number you want.
) button.
OR
Press the
button
Search. Searches the fax number which currently stored in
phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter name.
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
8
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display asks if you want to
send another page. Select
to add more documents or
to begin sending the
fax immediately.
9
The fax number stored in the group dial location is automatically dialed. The document
is sent when the remote fax machine answers.
199
Searching for a Number in the Memory
There are various ways to search for a number in the memory. You can either scan from A to Z
and Z to A sequentially, or you can search using the first letter of the name associated with the
number.
Searching Sequentially through the Memory
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
3
Press the Next (
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
5
Press Fax List
6
Press Individual or Group.
7
Press the
8
Press A to Z or Z to A.
) button.
View List.
button.
You can search upwards or downwards through the entire memory in alphabetical order,
from A to Z.
Searching with a Particular First Letter
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
200
2
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
3
Press the Next (
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
5
Press Fax List
6
Press Individual or Group.
7
Press the
8
Press Search.
) button.
View List.
button.
The pop-up keyboard appears. Press the letter you want to search for. A name beginning
with the letter displays.
Printing a Phonebook List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Phonebook list.
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email/Fax List.
4
Press Fax List
) button.
Print.
A list showing your speed dial and group dial entries prints out.
Other Ways to Fax
Sending a Delayed Fax
You can set your printer to store and then send a fax at a later time. You need to set start time
from the Setup
Machine Setup
Next ( )
Default Setting
Fax Default
Delayed Send before following the next steps.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press Fax from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Delayed Send.
4
Press the Next (
) button.
201
5
Press the Direct Input and enter the remote fax phone number using the keyboard.
OR
Press the Fax List and select speed dial you want.
6
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display asks if you want to
send another page. Select
to add more documents or
to begin sending the
fax immediately.
NOTE: If you want to cancel the delayed transmission, see "Canceling a Scheduled Fax".
Sending a Priority Fax
Using the Priority Fax feature, a high priority document can be sent ahead of reserved
operations. The document is scanned into the memory and transmitted when the current
operation is finished. In addition, the priority transmission interrupts a broadcast operation
between stations (i.e., when the transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station
B begins) or between redial attempts.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
202
2
Press Fax from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Priority Send.
4
Press the Next (
) button.
5
Press the Direct Input and enter the remote fax phone number using the keyboard.
OR
Press the Fax List and select speed dial you want.
6
If necessary, adjust the document contrast and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Contrast" or "Adjusting the Document Resolution"
7
Press Start ( ). (on the touch screen or the operator panel)
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display asks if you want to
send another page. Select
to add more documents or
to begin sending the
fax immediately.
Adding Documents to a Scheduled Fax
You can add documents to the delayed transmission previously reserved in your printer’s
memory.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast".
2
Press Job Status (
) in the operator panel.
OR
Press Setup
Job Status from the home screen.
3
Press the Next (
4
Press the up/down arrows until you see the fax job to which you want to add documents.
5
Select the fax job you want to add documents.
6
Press Add.
) button.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display asks if you want to
send another page. Select
to add more documents or
to begin sending the
fax immediately.
7
After storing, the printer displays the numbers of total pages and added pages and then
returns to the Standby mode.
Canceling a Scheduled Fax
1
Press Job Status (
) in the operator panel.
OR
Press Setup
Job Status from the home screen.
203
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows until you see the fax job you want to cancel.
4
Press the
5
Press
) button.
mark next to the fax job you want to cancel.
when the confirmation window appears.
The selected job is canceled.
Fax Forward to E-mail addresses
You can set the printer to forward all outgoing or incoming faxes to the e-mail addresses.
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Email Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Email Forward.
5
Select the option you want at Attachment Type or Print Local Copy.
6
Press Fax Forwarding.
7
Press the left/right arrows to select the appropriate option you want.
•
•
•
•
204
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
Off: Enables you to turn this feature off.
All Faxes: Enables you to forward both incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified
e-mail address.
Tx Only: Enables you to forward only outgoing faxes to a specified e-mail address.
Rcv Only: Enables you to forward only incoming faxes to a specified e-mail address.
When you select this option, you should choose whether the printer prints out the
incoming faxes.
8
Enter the From /To using the keyboard.
9
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Additional Features
Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You
can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out
received faxes when the printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes may
go into memory. When the mode turns off, any faxes stored may be printed.
NOTE: If the display shows a Memory Full message, your machine cannot receive fax. Delete any
documents you no longer need from the memory.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Fax Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Secure Receive.
5
Select On in the Configuration.
6
Enter a four-digit passcode you want to use, using the keyboard.
7
Re-enter the passcode again and press OK.
8
Press Close when the confirmation window appears.
9
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory
and displays Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax stored.
To print received documents:
1
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 thorough 4 "To turn the secure
receiving mode on:".
2
Select Print in the Configuration.
3
Enter the four-digit passcode and press OK.
The faxes stored in the memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 thorough 4 "To turn the secure
receiving mode on:".
2
Select Off in the Configuration.
205
3
Enter the four-digit passcode and press OK.
The mode is deactivated and the printer prints all of the faxes which have been stored in
memory.
4
Press Close when the confirmation window appears.
5
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Printing Reports
The following reports are available:
Printer Settings Report
This list shows the status of the user-selectable options. You may print this list to confirm your
changes after changing any settings.
Op-panel Menu Tree Report
This report shows information about the menu functions list.
Phone Book Report
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer’s memory as speed dial and
group dial numbers.
You can print this Phonebook list; see "Printing a Phonebook List".
Email Address Book Report
This report shows information about the Email address list.
Out-going Fax Report
This report shows information about the faxes you recently sent.
In-coming Fax Report
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received.
Scheduled Jobs Report
This list shows the documents currently stored for Delayed faxes or Toll Save faxes. The list
shows the starting time and the type of operation.
MSG Confirm Report
This report shows the fax number, the number of pages, the elapsed time of the job, the
communication mode, and the communication results.
206
Junk Fax List Report
This list shows up to 10 fax numbers specified as junk fax numbers by using the Junk Fax
Setup menu; see "Advanced Fax Setting Options". When the Junk Fax Setup feature is turned
on, incoming faxes from those numbers will be blocked.
This feature recognizes the last 6 digits of the fax number set as a remote machine’s ID.
Demo Page Report
Prints a demo page to ensure that the printer is operating correctly.
PCL Font List or PS Font List Report
This report shows the PCL or PS font list.
Network Settings Report
This list shows the status of the network options. You may print this list to confirm your
changes after changing any settings.
Email Report
This report shows information about the emails that you have recently sent.
Printing a Report
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Reports.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select the reports you want.
) button.
•
Printer Settings: Printer Settings list
•
Network Settings: Network Settings list
•
Fax List: Phonebook list
•
Email Address Book: Email Address Book list
•
Out-going Fax: Sent fax report
•
In-coming Fax: Received fax report
•
Scheduled Jobs: Scheduled job information
•
MSG Confirm: Message confirmation
•
Junk Fax List: Junk fax number lists
•
Email: Sent e-mail report
•
Op-panel Menu Tree : Menu Tree list
207
•
Demo Page: Demo page
•
PCL Font List: PCL Font list
•
PS Font List: PS Font list
The selected information prints out.
Using Advanced Fax Settings
Your printer has various user-selectable setting options for sending or receiving faxes. These
options are preset at the factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details about printing the list, see
"Printing a Report".
Changing Setting Options
1
Press Setup
Machine Setup from the home screen.
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Fax Setup.
4
Press the up/down arrows to select you want.
5
When the option that you want displays, choose the desired status by pressing the
left/right arrows.
6
Press the home icon (
) button.
) to return to the Standby mode.
Advanced Fax Setting Options
Option
Description
Send Forwarda
You can set the printer to always forward all of the outgoing faxes to the
specified destination besides the fax numbers you entered.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the number of the remote fax
machine to which the faxes are forwarded.
Receive Forwarda
You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax number
during a specified time period. When a fax arrives at your printer, it is stored
in the memory. Then, the printer dials the fax number that you have
specified and sends the fax.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the fax number to which the
faxes are forwarded and the start time and the end time. Also, you can
forward incoming faxes up to 25 fax numbers.
208
Option
Description
Toll Save
You can set your printer to store your faxes in memory and to send them at
the specified toll-saving time. For details about sending toll save faxes, see
"Toll Save Mode".
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the start time and date; and the
end time and date for toll save mode.
Junk Fax Setup
Using the Junk Fax Setup feature, the system will not accept faxes sent from
remote stations. Their numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax
numbers. This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.
Select Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.
Select On to turn the feature on. You can set up to 10 fax numbers as junk fax
numbers. After storing the numbers, you do not receive any faxes from the
registered stations.
Secure Receive
You can keep your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized
people.
For further details about setting this mode, see "Using the Secure Receiving
Mode".
Prefix Dial
You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before
any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the PABX exchange.
Stmp Rcvd Name
This option allows the printer to automatically print the page number, and
the date and time of the reception at the bottom of each page of a received
document.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on.
ECM Mode
The Error Correction Mode helps with poor line quality and ensures that
faxes are sent smoothly to any other ECM-equipped fax machine. If the line
quality is poor, it takes more time to send a fax when you are using the ECM
mode.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on.
Modem Speed
Select the maximum modem speed you want if the phone line fails to sustain
a higher modem speed. You can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, or 4.8 kbps.
Setup Wizard
Frequently used functions are gathered for users to set fax settings easily.
a You can set the printer to forward all outgoing or incoming faxes to specified e-mail addresses. Refer to "Fax Forward to
E-mail addresses".
209
Using an Answering machine
Line
Telephone Answering Device
Line
Phone
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
Figure 1
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as
shown in Figure 1.
Set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and set the Ring to Answer to a digit greater than the Rings
to Answer setting for the TAD.
•
When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are
received and then starts receiving the fax.
•
If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into Fax mode after a
predefined number of rings.
•
If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call if you
access Fax → On Hook Dial and press Start ( ) and then hang up the receiver, or
press the remote receive code *9* and hang up the receiver.
210
Using a Computer Modem
Line
Telephone Answering Device
Line
Computer
Phone
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
Figure 2
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet connection,
connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown here
in Figure 2.
•
Set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and set the Ring to Answer to a digit greater than the
rings to answer setting for the TAD.
•
Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.
•
Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.
•
To fax via the computer modem, follow the instructions provided with your computer
modem and fax application.
•
You can capture images using your printer and Dell ScanDirect and send them using your
fax application with the computer modem.
Fax Data Back-up
The Dell 2355dn Laser MFP has 4 MB (Approx. 200 pages at ITU-T #1 Chart) back-up
memory.
If there are no paper or no toner left during the fax receiving, the received fax data cannot be
printed. In this case, the machine automatically saves fax data in the back-up memory. But, if
the machine fails to complete the receiving fax, the rest of the fax data will not be saved the
memory.
211
212
Macintosh
Installing Software for Macintosh
Setting Up the Printer
Printing
Scanning
Your printer supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB interface or 10/100 Base-TX
network interface card. When you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the
PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.
Installing Software for Macintosh
The Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer provides you with the PPD
file that allows you to use the PostScript driver, for printing on a Macintosh computer.
Verify the following before you install the printer software:
Operating System
Requirements
CPU
RAM
Free Disk Space
Mac OS X 10.4 or
lower
• Power PC G4/G5
• Intel processors
• 128 MB for a Power PC
1 GB
based MAC (512 MB)
• 512 MB for an Intel-based
Mac (1 GB)
Mac OS X 10.5
• 867MHz or faster
Power PC G4/G5
• Intel processors
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.6
• Intel processors
1 GB (2GB)
1 GB
Install the printer driver
1
Ensure that you connect your printer to the computer. Turn on your computer and
printer.
2
Insert the Software and Documentation CD which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5
Double-click the MAC_Printer folder.
6
Double-click the Printer Driver Installer icon.
7
Enter the password and click OK.
8
Click Continue.
9
Select Easy Install and then click Install.
10
214
After the installation is finished, click Quit.
UnInstall the printer driver
1
Insert the Software and Documentation CD which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
3
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Printer folder.
5
Double-click the Printer Driver Uninstaller icon.
6
Enter the password and click OK.
7
Click Continue.
8
Click Uninstall and then click Uninstall.
9
After the uninstallation is finished, click Quit.
Install the Scan driver
1
Ensure that you connect your printer to the computer. Turn on your computer and
printer.
2
Insert the Software and Documentation CD which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5
Double-click the MAC_Twain folder.
6
Double-click the Installer icon.
7
Enter the password and click OK.
8
Click Continue.
9
Click Install.
10
After the installation is finished, click Quit.
UnInstall the scan driver
1
Insert the Software and Documentation CD which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
3
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
4
Double-click the MAC_Twain folder.
5
Double-click the Installer icon.
6
Enter the password and click OK.
215
7
Click Continue.
8
Click Uninstall and then click Uninstall.
9
After the uninstallation is finished, click Restart.
Setting Up the Printer
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use to connect the
printer to your computer—the network cable or the USB cable.
For a Network-connected Macintosh
1
Follow the instructions on "Installing Software for Macintosh" to install the PPD and
Filter files on your computer.
2
Open the Applications folder
Utilities, and Print Setup Utility.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~10.6, open System Preferences from the Applications folder, and
click Print & Fax.
3
Click Add on the Printer List.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~ 10.6, press the “+” icon then a display window will pop up.
4
For MAC OS 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
For MAC OS 10.4, click IP Printer.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~10.6, click IP.
5
Enter the printer’s IP address in the Printer Address field.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~10.6, enter the printer’s IP address in the Address field.
6
Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue
name for your printer server, try using the default queue first.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~ 10.6, enter the queue name in the Queue field.
7
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model
and your printer name in Model Name.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and
your printer name in Model.
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use...
and your printer name in Print Using.
For MAC OS 10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use...
and your printer name in Print Using.
216
8
Click Add.
9
Your printer’s IP address appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default printer.
For a USB-connected Macintosh
1
Follow the instructions on "Installing Software for Macintosh" to install the PPD and
Filter files on your computer.
2
Open the Applications folder
Utilities, and Print Setup Utility.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~ 10.6, open System Preferences from the Applications folder, and
click Print & Fax.
3
Click Add on the Printer List.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~ 10.6, press the “+” icon then a display window will pop up.
4
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB connection.
For MAC OS 10.5 ~ 10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.
5
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model
and your printer name in Model Name.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and
your printer name in Model.
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use...
and your printer name in Print Using.
For MAC OS 10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use...
and your printer name in Print Using.
6
Click Add.
Your printer appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default printer.
217
Printing
Printing a Document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer software setting in each
application you use. Follow these steps to print from a Macintosh.
1
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other options and click OK.
Ensure that your
printer is selected.
▲ Mac OS 10.4
4
Open the File menu and click Print.
5
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print.
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.
Changing Printer Settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your printer.
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.
218
Layout Setting
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You
can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Select Layout from the Presets drop-down list to access the following features. For details, see
"Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper" and "Duplex Printing".
▲ Mac OS 10.4
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a
cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.
2
Select Layout.
▲ Mac OS 10.4
219
3
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper on the Pages per
Sheet drop-down list.
4
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select the option you want from the
Border drop-down list.
5
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of pages on one side of each page.
Duplex Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which
edge you will be binding your finished document. The binding options are:
Long-Edge Binding: Conventional layout used in book binding.
Short-Edge Binding: Type often used with calendars.
CAUTION: If you have selected duplex printing and then try to print multiple copies of a
document, the printer may not print the document in the way you want. In case of “Collated copy”,
if your document has odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first page of the next copy
will be printed on the front and back of one sheet. In case of “Uncollated copy”, the same page
will be printed on the front and back of one sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a
document and you want those copies on both sides of the paper, you must print them one at a time,
as separate print jobs.
1
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.
2
Select the Layout.
▲ Mac OS 10.4
220
3
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option.
4
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
Printer Features Setting
The Printer Features tab provides options for selecting the paper type and adjusting print
quality.
Select Printer Features from the drop-down list to access the following features:
▲ Mac OS 10.4
Reverse Duplex Printing
Allows you to select general print order compare to duplex print order.
Fit to Page
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of
the digital document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small
document.
Paper Type
Ensure that Paper Type is set to Printer Default. If you load a different type of print material,
select the corresponding paper type.
Resolution
You can select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed
characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a
document.
221
Scanning
You can scan documents using Image Capture. Macintosh OS offers Image Capture.
1
Ensure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each
other.
2
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the USB cable and
reconnect it. If the problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.
4
Set the scan options on this program.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE: For more information about using Image Capture, please refer to the Image Capture’s
help.
NOTE: You can also using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop.
NOTE: Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software. Please refer to the user’s
guide of the software.
NOTE: When scanning does not operate, update Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning operates
properly in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.
222
Linux
Getting Started
Installing the MFP Driver
Using the Unified Driver Configurator
Configuring Printer Properties
Printing a Document
Scanning a Document
Getting Started
The supplied Software and Documentation CD provides you with Dell's MFP driver package for
using your printer with a Linux computer.
Dell's MFP driver package contains printer and scanner drivers, providing the ability to print
documents and scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications for configuring
your printer and further processing of the scanned documents.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver package enables you to monitor a
number of MFP devices via USB port. The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on
the same local MFP or network printers, sent by e-mail, uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred
to an external OCR system.
The MFP driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program. You do not
need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the MFP software: all
required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically; this is possible
on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones.
Installing the MFP Driver
System Requirements
Supported OS
•
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
•
Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 (32/64 bit)
•
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)
•
SuSE Linux 10.0, 10.1 (32 bit)
•
OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)
•
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1 (32/64 bit)
•
Ubuntu 5.04, 5.10, 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10 (32/64 bit)
•
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
•
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
Recommended Hardware Requirements
224
•
Pentium IV 2.4 GHz or higher (IntelCore2)
•
RAM 512 MB or higher
•
Free HDD space required: 1 GB or higher
NOTE: It is also necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large
scanned images.
NOTE: The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum.
Software
•
Linux Kernel 2.4 or higher
•
Glibc 2.2 or higher
•
CUPS
•
SANE
Installing the MFP Driver
1
Ensure that you connect your multi-function to your computer. Turn both the computer
and the printer on.
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter
the system password.
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer software. If you are not a super
user, ask your system administrator.
1
Insert the Software and Documentation CD. The Software and Documentation CD will
automatically run.
If the printer driver CD does not automatically run, click the
the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in:
icon at the bottom of
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh
If you still failed to run the CD-ROM, type the followings in sequence:
[root@localhost root]#umount/dev/hdc
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package
installed and configured.
2
Click Install.
3
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
225
226
4
Installation is started. When the installation is almost complete, the Add printer wizard
appears automatically. Click Next.
5
If you connect your printer using the USB cable, the following window appears. Select
your printer from the drop-down list and click Next.
OR
If you connect your printer using the network cable, the following window appears.
Check the Network printer, and select your printer from the drop-down list. Click Next.
227
6
If you connect your printer using the USB cable, you should choose a port you will use
with your printer. After choosing the port, click Next.
OR
If you connect your printer using the network cable, skip to the next step.
7
228
Select the driver and click Next.
8
Enter your printer’s name, location, description and click Next.
9
Click Finish to complete installation.
229
Click to configure the printer’s settings.
10
Click to print a test page.
When the following window appears, click Finish.
The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and
Dell MFP group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties,
consult the onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be
called from the driver package windows applications, such as Unified Driver
Configurator or Image Editor.
230
Uninstalling the MFP Driver
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter
the system password.
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer software. If you are not a super
user, ask your system administrator.
2
Insert the Software and Documentation CD. The Software and Documentation CD will
automatically run.
If the Software and Documentation CD does not automatically run, click the
the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in:
icon at
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package
installed and configured.
3
Click Uninstall.
4
Click Next.
5
Click Finish.
231
Using the Unified Driver Configurator
Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring MFP devices. Since
an MFP device combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Driver Configurator provides
options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port
option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and scanner via a single I/O
channel.
After installing the MFP driver, the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be
created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified driver Configurator
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Dell MFP and then Unified Driver
Configurator.
2
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the corresponding configuration
window.
Printers Configuration button
Scanners Configuration button
MFP Ports Configuration button
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help.
3
232
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator.
Printers Configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs; Printers and Classes.
Printers Tab
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button
on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.
Switches to Printer
configuration.
Shows all of the
installed printer.
Shows the status, model
name and URI of your
printer.
You can use the following printer control buttons:
•
Refresh: renews the available printers list.
•
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.
•
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.
•
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default printer.
•
Stop: stop the printer.
•
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly.
•
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer properties. For details, see
"Configuring Printer Properties".
233
Classes Tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.
Shows all of the printer
classes.
Shows the status of the
class and the number of
printers in the class.
234
•
Refresh: Renews the classes list.
•
Add Class...: Allows you to add a new printer class.
•
Remove Class: Removes the selected printer class.
Scanners Configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of installed Dell
MFP devices, change device properties, and scan images.
Switches to Scanners
configuration.
Shows all of the
installed scanners.
Shows the vendor, model
name and type of your
scanner.
•
Properties...: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document. See
"Scanning a Document".
235
MFP Ports Configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available MFP ports, check the status of each port and
release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason.
Switches to MPF ports
configuration.
Shows all of the
available ports.
Shows the port type,
device connected to the
port and status.
•
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
•
Release port: Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your printer may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port. Since the
MFP device contains more than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize
proper access of “consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Dell MFP driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by
Dell printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called MFP ports. The
current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the MFP Ports Configuration. The port
sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device, while another
block is in use.
When you install a new MFP printer onto your system, it is strongly recommended you do this
with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose
I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP’s
functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so
proper settings are applied by default.
236
Configuring Printer Properties
Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the
various properties for your machine as a printer.
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2
Select your printer on the available printers list and click Properties.
3
The Printer Properties window opens.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
4
•
General: allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in
this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration.
•
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If you change the printer port
from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port
in this tab.
•
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you
can set the default device options.
•
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel Job to cancel the selected job and
select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.
•
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click Add to Class to add your printer
to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the selected
class.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties Window.
237
Printing a Document
Printing from Applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application.
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the File menu.
2
Select Print directly using lpr.
3
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the Printer list and
click Properties.
Click.
4
238
Change the printer and print job properties.
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.
•
General: allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of
the documents, enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes
the number of pages per sheet.
•
Text: allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing
or columns.
•
Graphics: allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files,
such as color options, image size, or image position.
•
Advanced: allows you to set the print resolution, paper source, and destination.
5
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
239
Printing Files
You can print many different types of files on the Dell MFP device using the standard CUPS
way - directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do that. But
the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI
program.
To print any document file:
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR
GUI window appears.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first.
Just select any files you want to print and click Open.
2
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list, and change the printer and
print job properties.
For details about the properties window, see "Printing a Document".
3
Click OK to start printing.
Scanning a Document
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
2
Click the
3
Select the scanner on the list.
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
Click your scanner.
240
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the computer and turned on,
your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected.
If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer, you can select any scanner
to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner, you
may select the second scanner, set the device options and start the image acquisition
simultaneously.
NOTE: The scanner name shown in Scanners configuration can be different from the device name.
4
Click Properties.
5
Load the document to be scanned face up into the DADF or face down on the document
glass.
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane.
Drag the pointer to set the
image area to be scanned.
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections.
•
Image Quality: allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the
image.
•
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The Advanced button enables you to set the
page size manually.
241
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select from the Job Type
drop-down list. For details about the preset Job Type settings, see "Adding Job Type
Settings".
You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking Default.
8
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the
scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.
9
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager window.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. For further details about editing
an image, see "Using the Image Editor".
10
When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.
11
Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name.
12
Click Save.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning.
To save a new Job Type setting:
242
1
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
2
Click Save As.
3
Enter the name for your setting.
4
Click OK.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down list.
2
Click Save.
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved setting is
automatically selected for the scan job.
To delete a Job Type setting:
1
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down list.
2
Click Delete.
The setting is deleted from the list
Using the Image Editor
The Image Manager window provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your
scanned image.
Use these tools to edit
the image.
243
You can use the following tools to edit the image:
Tools
Function
Saves the image.
Cancels your last action.
Restores the action you canceled.
Zooms the image out.
Zooms the image in.
Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crops the selected image area.
Allows you to scale the image size; you can enter the size manually, or set the
rate to scale proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.
Allows you to rotate the image; you can select the number of degrees from the
drop-down list.
Allows you to flip the image vertically or horizontally.
Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image, or to invert the
image.
Shows the properties of the image.
For further details about the Image Manager program, refer to the onscreen help.
244
Maintenance
Clearing the printer NVRAM
Backing up Data
Cleaning Your Printer
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge
Replacement Parts
Ordering Supplies
Clearing the printer NVRAM
CAUTION: Before clearing the memory, make sure that all fax jobs have been completed, or you
will lose those jobs.
You can selectively clear information stored in your printer’s memory.
1
Press Setup
2
Press the Next (
3
Press the up/down arrows to select Restore Options.
4
Press the up/down arrows until you see the option you want to clear.
5
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
•
Printer Setup: Clears all of the data stored in the memory and resets all of your
settings to the factory default.
•
Paper Setup: Restores all of the Paper Setting options to the factory default.
•
Tray Behavior: Restores all of the Tray Behavior options to the factory default.
•
Copy Default: Restores all of the copy options to the factory default.
•
Fax Default: Restores all of the Fax Setup options to the factory default.
•
Scan Default: Restores all of the scan options to the factory default.
•
Sent Report: Clears all records of your sent faxes.
•
Rcvd Report: Clears all records of your received faxes.
Press
when the confirmation window appears.
The selected memory is cleared.
6
246
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Backing up Data
Date in the printer's memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure.
Backup helps you protect your Email/Fax List entries and the system settings by storing them
as backup files on a USB memory key.
NOTE: In case of the phonebook, you can save the phonebook in csv file format. So that you can
confirm or modify the phone list in your computer.
Backing up Data
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
2
Press Setup
3
Press the Next (
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select the export setting and press Export Setting.
6
Press the option you want to back up.
7
Press
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
when the confirmation window appears.
The data is backed up to the USB memory key.
8
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
Restoring Data
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
2
Press Setup
3
Press the Next (
4
Press the up/down arrows to select Initial Setup.
5
Press the up/down arrows to select the import setting and press Import Setting.
6
Press the option you want to back up.
7
Press
Machine Setup from the home screen.
) button.
when the confirmation window appears.
The data is backed up to the USB memory key.
8
Press the home icon (
) to return to the Standby mode.
247
Cleaning Your Printer
To maintain the print quality, follow the cleaning procedures below, each time the toner
cartridge is replaced or if print quality problems occur.
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer roller located under the toner cartridge when cleaning inside the
printer. Oil from your fingers may cause print quality problems.
CAUTION: Cleaning solvents that contain alcohol or other strong substances may discolor or
crack the printer cabinet.
Cleaning the Exterior
Clean the printer cabinet with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. Do not let water drip onto the
printer or inside the printer.
Cleaning the Interior
Paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and cause print quality
problems, such as smearing or toner specks. Clean inside the printer to prevent these
problems.
1
Power the printer off and unplug the power cord. Allow a reasonable amount of time for
the printer to cool down.
2
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge straight out. Set it on a clean flat
surface.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for more than a few
minutes.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the
cartridge to avoid touching this area.
248
3
With a dry and lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner
cartridge area and the toner cartridge cavity.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller inside the printer. Oil from your fingers may cause
print quality problems.
transfer roller
4
Locate the long strip of glass Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) inside the top of the cartridge
compartment, and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotton black.
249
250
5
Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover.
6
Plug in the power cord and power the printer on.
Cleaning the scanner
Keeping the scanner and DADF glass clean ensure the highest quality copies, scans, and sent
faxes. Dell recommends cleaning the scanner at the start of each day and during the day, as
needed.
NOTE: If there are lines present on copied or faxed documents, check your scanner and DADF
glass for any particles.
1
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2
Open the document cover.
3
Wipe the surface of the document glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry.
1
2
3
4
1
white sheet
2
document cover
3
DADF glass
4
document glass
NOTE: Documents are moved across the DADF glass. As a result, the DADF glass may need special
attention to remove built-up residue.
4
Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until it is clean and dry.
5
Close the document cover.
251
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge
Storing the Toner Cartridge
Store the toner cartridge in the original packaging until you are ready to install it.
Do not store the toner cartridge in:
•
Temperatures greater than 40° C (104° F)
•
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature
•
Direct sunlight
•
Dusty places
•
A car for a long period of time
•
An environment where corrosive gases are present
•
An environment with salty air
Redistributing Toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks or light print occurs. The
toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display. Thoroughly shake
the cartridge from side-to-side 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge
and temporarily improve print quality.
This is not intended to be a long term method of correction, but meant to assist your printing
needs until you obtain a new cartridge assembly.
252
1
Open the front cover.
2
Pull the toner cartridge out.
3
Thoroughly shake the cartridge from side-to-side 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
NOTE: If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wipe the toner off with a dry cloth and
wash your clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle
on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
4
Holding the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening
in the printer.
5
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the printer will guide
the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.
253
6
Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is surely closed.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When the toner eventually runs out, only blank pages print when a print job or copy job are
sent. The toner-related message saying that the toner is empty may appear on the display.
In that case the incoming faxes are only saved in the memory and not printed. At this stage,
the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.
Order an extra toner cartridge so you will have it on hand when the current cartridge no longer
prints satisfactorily. See "Ordering Supplies" to order toner cartridges.
CAUTION: For best results, use Dell toner cartridge. Print quality and printer reliability are not
guaranteed if you do not use Dell supplies.
To replace the toner cartridge:
254
1
Open the front cover.
2
Pull the toner cartridge out.
3
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
4
Remove the packing tape and thoroughly shake the cartridge from side-to-side to
distribute the toner.
Save the box and the cover for shipping.
NOTE: If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wipe the toner off with a dry cloth and
wash your clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle
on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
5
Holding the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening
in the printer.
6
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the printer will guide
the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.
7
Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is surely closed.
255
Cleaning the Drum
If there are streaks or spots on your print, the Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) drum of the
toner cartridge may require cleaning.
1
Before setting the cleaning procedure, ensure that paper is loaded in the paper tray.
2
Press Setup from the home screen.
3
Press Maintenance
4
Press Clean Drum.
Next (
).
The printer prints out a cleaning page. Toner particles on the drum surface are affixed to
the paper.
5
If the problem remains, repeat steps 3 through 4 until toner particles are not affixed to
the paper.
Replacement Parts
From time to time, you needs to replace the rollers and fuser unit to maintain top performance
and to avoid print quality problems and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts.
The following items should be replaced after you have printed the specified number of pages.
Item
Yield (Average)
DADF rubber pad
Approx. 20,000 pages
Transfer roller
Approx. 70,000 pages
Fuser unit
Approx. 80,000 pages
Tray rubber pad
Approx. 100,000 pages
Pickup roller
Approx. 150,000 pages
To purchase replacement parts, contact your Dell dealer or the retailer where you bought your
printer. We strongly recommend that these items be installed by a trained service professional.
256
Ordering Supplies
You can order supplies using the Dell Toner Management System or the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
If your printer is connected to a network, type your printer’s IP address in your Web browser
and click the toner supplies link.
1
Double-click the Dell 2355dn Laser MFP Toner Reorder icon on your desktop.
OR
2
From the Start menu, select Programs
Dell Printers
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP Toner Reorder.
Dell 2355dn Laser MFP
The Order Toner Cartridges window appears.
Go to premier.dell.com or www.premier.dell.com to order supplies online.
If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the Order by Phone heading.
OR
If your printer is connected to a network, type the printer’s IP address in your Web
browser to launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the supplies link.
257
NOTE: Refer to the following table to order toner cartridges.
Toner cartridge
Part number
Dell Standard Capacity Toner Cartridge (3,000 pagesa)
CR963
Dell High Capacity Toner Cartridge (10,000 pagesa)
YTVTC
a ISO standard page coverage in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752 testing methodology.
258
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams in the DADF
Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray
Clearing LCD Error Messages
Solving Problems
Clearing Jams in the DADF
When a document jams while it passes through the DADF, a warning message appears on the
display.
NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the document glass for thick, thin or mixed documents.
1
Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.
If the document is jammed in the paper feed area:
a
Open the DADF cover.
b
Remove the document by gently pulling it out.
c
Close the DADF cover. Then reload the document into the DADF.
If the document is jammed in the paper exit area:
260
a
Open the DADF cover.
b
Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out of the
DADF.
c
Remove the document by gently pulling it out.
261
d
Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then load the documents back
into the DADF.
If the document is jammed in the duplex path:
262
a
Open the DADF cover.
b
Open the DADF inner cover.
c
Remove the document by gently pulling it out.
d
Close the DADF inner cover and the DADF cover. Then load the documents back
into the DADF.
2
If you cannot see the paper or cannot pull the jammed paper out, open the document
cover.
3
Remove the document from the feed area by carefully pulling it gently to the right.
263
4
Close the document cover. Then load the documents back into the DADF.
Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray
When a paper jam occurs, Paper Jam appears on the display. Refer to the table below to locate
and clear the paper jam.
Operator Panel Message
Location of Jam
Go to
Paper jam in Tray 1
Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)
"Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)"
"Paper Feed Jam (optional tray
2)"
Paper jam in optional Tray 2 Paper Feed Jam (optional tray 2)
Paper jam in MPF
Paper Feed Jam (MPF)
Paper jam inside of
machine
Fuser Area Jam
"Fuser Area Jam".
Paper jam in exit area
between the fuser and exit area Jam
"Paper Exit Jam".
Paper jam in duplex unit
between the duplex unit and fuser area "Duplex Jam 0".
Paper jam in duplex path
in the duplex unit
"MPF Jam"
"Duplex Jam 1".
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly. Follow the steps
below to clear the jam.
264
Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper automatically exits the printer.
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.
2
Pull the paper tray open.
3
Remove the paper by gently pulling it straight out.
265
If you cannot see the paper or the paper does not move when pulled, check the fuser area.
For more information, see "Fuser Area Jam".
4
Insert the paper tray into the printer until it snaps into place.
Printing automatically resumes.
Paper Feed Jam (optional tray 2)
266
1
Pull the optional tray 2 open.
2
Remove the jammed paper from the printer.
If you cannot see the paper in this area or the paper does not move when pulled, go to the
next step.
3
Pull the tray 1 half way out.
4
Pull the paper straight up and out.
5
Insert the trays back into the printer.
Printing automatically resumes.
267
MPF Jam
1
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the printer.
2
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.
Fuser Area Jam
NOTICE: The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the printer.
268
1
Open the front cover and lightly pull the toner cartridge straight out.
2
Remove the paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
Paper Exit Jam
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper automatically exits the printer.
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.
2
Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.
269
3
If you cannot see the paper in the output tray or the paper does not move when pulled,
open the rear door.
4
If you see the jammed paper, push the two blue pressure levers down and remove the
paper. Skip to step 9.
If you do not see the paper, go to the next step.
5
270
Fully open the rear door, as shown.
6
Unfold the duplex guide fully.
7
While pushing the fuser lever to the right, open the fuser door.
NOTE: Ensure that to unfold the duplex guide before opening the fuser door or you may
damage the fuser door.
271
8
Pull the jammed paper out.
If the jammed paper does not move when you pull, push the two blue pressure levers up
to loosen the paper, and then remove it.
9
Return the fuser door, and duplex guide to their original position.
10
Close the rear door.
11
Open and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
272
Duplex Jam
Duplex Jam 0
1
Pull the duplex unit out of the printer.
2
Remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit.
If the paper does not come out with the duplex unit, remove the paper from the bottom
of the printer.
273
3
Push the duplex unit to the printer.
4
Open and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
CAUTION: If you do not push the duplex unit correctly, paper jam may occur.
Duplex Jam 1
274
1
Open the rear door.
2
Unfold the duplex guide fully.
3
Pull the jammed paper out.
4
Return the duplex guide and close the rear door.
5
Open and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams
By selecting the correct paper types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam
occurs, follow the steps outlined in "Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray".
•
Follow the procedures in "Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray". Ensure that the
adjustable guides are correctly positioned.
•
Do not overload the paper tray. Ensure that the paper is below the paper capacity mark
on the inside wall of the paper tray.
•
Do not remove the paper from the tray while your printer is printing.
•
Flex, fan and straighten the paper before loading.
•
Do not use creased, damp or curled paper.
•
Do not mix paper types in the paper tray.
•
Use only recommended print materials. See "Paper Specifications".
•
Ensure that the recommended print side of print materials is facing down in the paper
tray and facing up in the MPF.
•
Ensure that the duplex unit is installed correctly.
275
Clearing LCD Error Messages
NOTE: You may see an exclamation mark (
) or a cross mark (
that case, press the cross mark to browse detailed message.
) on the upper of the display, in
NOTE: [xxx] indicates the media type.
NOTE: [yyy] indicates the tray.
NOTE: [zzz] indicates the paper size.
NOTE: Some error messages are provided with graphical images on the LCD of the operator panel.
NOTE: If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the printing job again. If the
problem persists, call for service.
NOTE: When you call for service, provide display message to service representative. You can get
help easily.
NOTE: Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options.
Display message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Fax line not connected
Your printer cannot connect with a remote
printer or has lost contact because of a
problem with the phone line.
• Try again. If the problem persists, please
wait for an hour or try a different phone line
if possible and then try to connect again.
• Turn the ECM mode on. See "ECM Mode".
• Check that the phone line is connected
properly. See "Connecting the Telephone
Line".
• Check that the phone socket in the wall is
used by plugging in another phone.
OR
No dial tone sounds
DADF Door Open
The DADF door is not securely latched.
Close the cover.
A non-USB device is connected with USB
memory port.
Remove the non-USB device from USB
memory port.
DADF Exit Door Open
Device is not supported
DADF paper jam at entry The loaded document has jammed in the
DADF paper jam at exit DADF.
Clear the document jam. See "Clearing Jams
in the DADF".
DADF paper jam in
duplex path
DADF Rev. Jam
Duplex Fan1 Locked
Duplex Fan2 Locked
276
A problem has occurred in the duplex unit.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back in. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Display message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Duplex Unit is not
installed
The duplex unit is not installed.
Check duplex unit.
Paper jam in duplex unit Paper has jammed during duplex printing.
Clear the jam. See "Duplex Jam 0".
Paper jam in duplex path Paper has jammed during duplex printing.
Clear the jam. See "Duplex Jam 1".
Email Job is completed
with error :
There is a problem in DNS.
Configure the DNS setting.
Email Job is completed
with error :
Pop3 Error
There is a problem in POP3.
Configure the POP3 setting.
Email Job is completed
with error :
Send Failed
There is a problem in SMTP.
Change to the available server.
Email Job is completed
with error :
Authentication Failure
There is a problem in SMTP authentication.
Configure the authentication setting.
Email Job is completed
with error :
Connection with the SMTP is server failed.
Check the network cable is connected
properly.
DNS Error
Server Connection Error
OR
Contact your SMTP server administrator.
Email Job is completed
with error :
Mail exceed server
support
The mail size is larger than the supported size Divide your mail or reduce the resolution.
by SMTP server.
Email Job is completed
with error :
Mail too large
Single page data exceeds the configured mail Reduce the resolution and try again.
size.
Email Job is completed
with error :
The memory is full.
Remove data in the memory.
Memory Full
Email Job is completed
with error :
There is no available individual number or no Enter the number or email address manually
email address has assigned it.
using the numeric keypad.
Not Assigned Group
277
Display message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Email Job is completed
with error :
There is a problem in POP3.
Configure the POP3 setting.
A problem has occurred in the fax unit.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back in. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Pop3
Fax Unit Error
Fax Job is completed with The receiving fax number is classified as junk Change the Junk Fax Setup option.
error
fax number.
Incompatiable
Fax Job is completed with The machine has a communication problem. Ask the sender to try again.
error :
Communication Error
Fax Job is completed with You have tried to select a group location
Use a speed dial number or dial a number
error :
number where only a single location number manually
can be used, such as when adding locations for
Group not available
a multiple send operation.
Fax Job is completed with The receiving fax machine did not answer or
error :
the line is already engaged.
Try again after in a few minutes.
Line Busy
Fax Job is completed with Your machine cannot connect with the
error :
receiving fax machine or has lost contact
because of a problem with the phone line.
Line Error
Try again. If the problem persists, wait an
hour or so until the line is clear and then try
again.
OR
Turn the ECM mode on.
Fax Job is completed with The remote fax machine has not answered
error :
after several redial attempts.
Try again. Verify the number to ensure that a
fax can be received.
No Answer
Fax Job is completed with The memory is full.
error :
Memory Full
Fuser Error
Low Heat Error
Over Heat Error
Fuser unit Error
278
There is a problem in the fuser unit.
• Split the transmission into more than one
operation.
• Print received faxes.
• Cancel reserved fax in the Priority Fax
feature.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back in. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Display message
Meaning
Hub is not supported
USB hub device should not be connected with Remove the USB hub device from USB
USB memory port.
memory port.
Invalid Cartridge
The toner cartridge you have installed is not
for your printer.
Install a Dell-genuine toner cartridge,
designed for your printer.
IP Conflict
The IP address is used by another user.
Check the IP address or obtain a new IP
address.
Load the following media There is no paper in the tray.
in the [yyy]
Suggested solutions
Load paper in the tray. See "Loading Print
Media in the Paper Tray".
Paper Size: [zzz]
Paper Type: [xxx]
Continue / Close
LSU Motor Error
A problem has occurred in the LSU.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Main Motor Locked
There is a problem in the main motor.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Memory Error
Memory failure.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Memory Full
The memory is full.
Delete unnecessary documents, and try
again.
Network Cable Error
The network cable is disconnected.
Connect the network cable. See "Connecting
the printer to the Network".
Network Card Error
The network card is not installed.
Install the network card.
Oversize Document
Original paper is too long for scanner.
Check original size.
Paper jam in MPF
Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the
paper tray.
Clear the jam.
LSU Fan Locked
LSU Hsync Error
Paper jam in Tray 1
Paper jam in optional
Tray 2
Paper jam inside of
machine
Paper has jammed inside of machine.
Paper jam in exit area
Paper has jammed in the fuser and exit area.
See "Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)", "Paper Feed
Jam (optional tray 2)" or "MPF Jam".
Clear the jam.
See "Fuser Area Jam".
Clear the jam.
See "Paper Exit Jam".
279
Display message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Check
Paper has jammed in the fuser area.
Clear the jam.
Cartridge Area
See "Fuser Area Jam".
Fuser Door Open
The fuser door is not securely latched.
Open the rear door and close the fuser door
until it locks into place. For the location of
the fuser door, see "Paper Exit Jam".
Rear Cover is open
The rear door was opened.
Close the rear door.
Scanner lock is engaged,
unlock it
The scanner module is locked.
Unlock the scanner.
Scan Job is completed
with error :
The same named file is already exist.
Enter a different file name.
All file names are used already.
Delete unnecessary files.
Change the server settings.
File Access Denied
Login to the network server was successful.
However, access to the file on the network
server was denied.
Self
Diagnostic...
The engine in your printer is checking some
problems.
Please wait a few minutes.
SMPS Error
A problem has occurred in the SMPS unit.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Standard Bin Full
The document output tray is full.
The document output tray can hold up to
150 sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is
removed from the document output tray, the
printer resumes printing.
Toner Cartridge is not
installed
The toner cartridge is not installed.
Install the toner cartridge. See "Installing the
Toner Cartridge".
Toner Supply Error
Toner did not supply enough.
File Existed
Scan Job is completed
with error :
Filename is too long
Scan Job is completed
with error :
Please wait
The front cover is not securely latched.
Close the cover until it locks into place.
Toner Cartridge Error
Toner cartridge error.
The front cover is not securely latched.
Close the cover until it locks into place.
280
Display message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Toner Almost Empty
Replace Toner Now
The toner cartridge is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
Toner Exhausted
The lifespan of the toner cartridge is reached. The toner cartridge is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one
for the best print quality. See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridge".
Toner Low
The toner cartridge is almost empty.
Take out the toner cartridge and thoroughly
shake it. By doing this, you can temporarily
increase printing quality.
OR
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one
for the best print quality. See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridge".
Tray 2 Open
The tray2 is not securely latched.
Unusable Device
A non-USB mass storage device, such as USB Remove the non-USB mass storage device
mouse, is connected with USB memory port. from USB memory port.
USB Job is completed
with error :
The selected file type is not supported.
Close the Tray 2.
Enter the correct file type again.
Not supported file type
281
Solving Problems
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested
solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, contact Dell.
Paper Feeding Problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Paper is jammed during
printing.
Clear the paper jam. See "Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray".
Paper sticks together.
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the paper tray. The paper tray can hold up to
250 sheets of paper, depending on the thickness of your paper.
• Ensure that you are using the correct type of paper. See "Paper Specifications".
• Remove paper from the paper tray and flex or fan the paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do not • Different types of paper may be stacked in the paper tray. Load paper of only one type,
feed.
size and weight.
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam, clear the paper jam. See "Clearing Jams in
the Paper Tray".
Paper does not feed into the
printer.
•
•
•
•
The paper keeps jamming.
• Ensure that the correct paper size is selected. See "Setting the Paper Size".
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications
required by the printer. See "Paper Specifications".
• There may be debris inside the printer. Open the front cover and remove the debris.
Transparencies stick together
in the paper exit.
Use only the transparencies specifically designed for a laser printer. Remove each
transparency as it exits from the printer.
Envelopes skew or fail to feed
correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
282
Remove any obstructions from inside the printer. See "Cleaning the Interior".
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the
printer. See "Paper Specifications".
Printing Problems
Condition
Possible cause
The printer does not
print.
The printer is not receiving Check the power cord connections. Check the power switch and
power.
the power source.
The printer is not selected
as the default printer.
Suggested solutions
Select Dell 2355dn Laser MFP as your default printer in your
Windows.
Click the Start button Settings → Printers. Right-click the Dell
2355dn Laser MFP printer icon and select Set as Default Printer.
Check the printer for the
following:
•
•
•
•
The front or rear door is not closed.
Paper is jammed.
No paper is loaded.
The toner cartridge is not installed.
If a printer system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it.
between the computer and
the printer is not connected
properly.
The connection cable
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working
between the computer and properly and print a job. You can also try using a different printer
the printer is defective.
cable.
The printer may be
configured incorrectly.
Check the printer properties to ensure that all of the print settings
are correct.
The printer driver may be
incorrectly installed.
Remove the printer driver and then reinstall it; see "Uninstalling
Software" and "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows®
Operating System" respectively.
The printer is
malfunctioning.
Check the display message on the operator panel to see if the
printer is indicating a system error.
The printer selects
print materials from
the wrong paper
source.
The paper source selection For many software applications, the paper source selection is found
in the printer properties
under the Paper tab within the printer properties. Select the correct
may be incorrect.
paper source. See "Paper Tab".
A print job is
extremely slow.
The job may be very
complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality
settings.
The maximum print speed of your printer is up to 35 PPM for
Letter-sized paper.
283
Condition
Possible cause
Half the page is blank. The page orientation
setting may be incorrect.
The paper size and the
paper size settings do not
match.
The printer prints,
The printer cable is loose or
but the text is wrong, defective.
garbled, or
incomplete.
The wrong printer driver
was selected.
Suggested solutions
Change the page orientation in your application. See "Basic Tab".
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the
paper in the tray.
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you
have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and
the printer to another computer and try a print job that you know
works. Finally, try a new printer cable.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your
printer is selected.
The software application is Try printing a job from another application.
malfunctioning.
Pages print, but are
blank.
The operating system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Power the printer off and
then back on again.
The toner cartridge is
defective or out of toner.
Thoroughly shake the toner. See "Redistributing Toner".
The file may have blank
pages.
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such as the
Contact a service representative.
controller or the board, may
be defective.
The illustrations print The setting in the software Print the document by selecting Download as Bit Image in the
Advanced window of the Graphic properties.
incorrectly in Adobe application is wrong.
Illustrator.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the photo Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the
is very low.
software application, the resolution will be reduced.
The machine prints,
but the text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
If you are under the DOS
environment, the font
setting for your machine
may be set incorrectly.
Suggested solutions: Change the language setting. See "Printer
Settings Utility".
Before printing, the
Using damp paper can
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.
machine emits vapor cause vapor during printing.
near the output tray.
284
Printing Quality Problems
The inside of the printer may be dirty or improper paper loading may reduce the print quality. See the table
below to clear the problem.
Condition
Suggested solutions
Light or faded print
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page:
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life.
See "Redistributing Toner". If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner
cartridge.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper is too moist or too
rough. See "Paper Specifications".
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs
cleaning. See "Cleaning the Interior".
• The surface of the LSU part inside the printer may be dirty. Clean the LSU (see
"Cleaning the Interior").
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Toner specks
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Dropouts
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper is too moist or too rough.
See "Paper Specifications".
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your printer. See "Cleaning the
Interior".
• The paper path may need cleaning. See "Cleaning the Drum".
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface.
Try a different brand of paper. See "Paper Specifications".
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing process can cause some areas to reject toner. Try
a different kind or brand of paper.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. "Vertical repetitive defects" on the next page.
• If these steps do not correct the problems, contact a service representative.
285
Condition
Suggested solutions
White Spots
White spots appears on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a
service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative.
Vertical lines
• If black vertical streaks appear on the page, the drum inside the toner cartridge has
probably been scratched. Install a new toner cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge".
• If white vertical streaks appear on the page, the surface of the LSU part inside the printer
may be dirty. Clean the LSU (see "Cleaning the Interior").
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Gray background
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Toner smear
286
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
• Change to lighter weight pages. See "Paper Specifications".
• Check the printer’s environment; very dry (low humidity) or high humidity (higher than
80% RH) conditions can increase the amount of background shading.
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one. See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge".
• Clean the inside of the printer. See "Cleaning the Interior".
• Check the paper type and quality. See "Paper Specifications".
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
Condition
Suggested solutions
Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a repetitive mark occurs on the page, print a
cleaning sheet several times to clean the cartridge; see "Cleaning the Drum". After the
printout, if you still have the same problems, install a new toner cartridge. See "Replacing
the Toner Cartridge".
• Parts of the printer may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page,
the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter
A
Background scatter results from bits of toner distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open
packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing
over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause
problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print
resolution through your software application or the printer properties.
Misformed characters
• If characters are improperly formed and produce hollow images, the paper stock may be
too slick. Try a different paper. See "Paper Specifications".
• If characters are improperly formed and produce a wavy effect, the scanner unit may need
service. For service, contact a service representative.
Page skew
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. See "Paper Specifications".
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight
or too loose against the paper stack.
AaBbCc
AaBbC
AaBbCcc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
287
Condition
Suggested solutions
Curl or wave
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperatures and humidity can cause paper
curl. See "Paper Specifications".
• Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the paper
tray.
• Try printing to the rear door.
Wrinkles or creases
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. See "Paper Specifications".
• Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the paper
tray.
• Try printing to the rear door.
Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaks in the toner. Clean the inside of the printer. See "Cleaning the Interior".
Black pages
A
288
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert.
• The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing. Install a new toner cartridge.
See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
• The printer may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Condition
Suggested solutions
Loose toner
•
•
•
•
Character Voids
Character voids have white areas where they should be solid black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the
composition of the transparency, some character voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Turn over the stack of paper in the
paper tray.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications. See "Paper Specifications".
A
Horizontal stripes
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
Curl
Clean the inside of the printer. See "Cleaning the Interior".
Check the paper type and quality. See "Paper Specifications".
Install a new toner cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
If the problem persists, the printer may require repair. Contact a service representative.
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the toner cartridge and reinsert.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Install a new toner cartridge. See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridge".
• If the problem persists, the printer may require repair. Contact a service representative.
If the printed paper is curled or the paper does not feed into the printer:
• Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the paper
tray.
• Try printing to other rear door.
289
Fax Problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Receiving fax calls are not being
answered by the printer
• Receive Mode set to Tel mode. (manual receive mode)
• The rings-to-answer setting might not be set correctly. (Under Ans/Fax mode, set the
Ring to Answer to a digit greater than the Ring to Answer setting for the TAD.)
• The DPRD feature might be turned on, but you do not have the service, or you do
have the service and the feature is not set correctly.
• The fax line cord might not be correctly connected, or the fax line cord is faulty.
• The printer might not be able to detect Receiving fax tones because the answering
machine is playing a voice message.
• A voice-messaging service might be interfering with the printer as it attempts to
answer calls.
• Fax Line might have signal integration issues. Please carry out Fax Line Test from
Op-panel to confirm line status. See "Testing Fax line connection".
• The printer is monitoring line condition while it is receiving or sending a fax job. If an
error occurs during the transmission and the ECM Mode setting is On, the printer
may request that the portion of the fax job to be resent. You should turn off ECM
Mode only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax job, and you are willing
to accept the errors in the transmission job. Turning off the setting might be useful
when you are trying to send a fax long distant or receive from long distant (example:
other countries etc.)
• The printer might be out of paper and the memory is full.
The printer cannot receive faxes
from an extension telephone.
• The fax cable might not be securely connected.
• The printer dialing mode might be incorrectly set, or the extension phone might be
incorrectly set.
Faxes are not received
automatically.
• The Fax mode should be selected.
• Make sure that there is paper in the paper tray.
• Check to see if the display shows Memory Full.
The Receiving fax has blank
spaces or is received in
poor-quality.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your printer by making a copy.
Receiving faxes are too light.
The printer might be running out of toner while printing a fax. Under Toner empty
conditions, the printer will store the fax job into memory, as soon as possible, replace
the print cartridge, and then reprint the fax.
Faxes are printed on two pages
instead of one.
The auto reduction setting may be turned Off, try enabling this setting
290
Condition
Suggested solutions
Receiving Faxes are not been
printed by the printer
Receive Forward feature might be turned Off, try enabling this setting. You can set the
printer to forward all incoming faxes to specified e-mail addresses. Please carry out Fax
Line Test from Op-panel to confirm line status. See "Testing Fax line connection".
The printer is not sending fax.
• If your printer is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be generating a dial tone
that the printer cannot detect.
• Fax Line might have signal integration issues. Please carry out Fax Line Test from
Op-panel to confirm line status. See "Testing Fax line connection".
No dial tone sound.
• Check that the phone line is connected properly. Please carry out Fax Line Test from
Op-panel to confirm line status. See "Testing Fax line connection".
• Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
• Fax Line might have signal integration issues. Please carry out Fax Line Test from
Op-panel to confirm line status. See "Testing Fax line connection".
The printer dials a number, but The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer Receiving
the connection with another fax calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the problem.
machine fails.
Faxes stop during sending.
•
•
•
•
•
•
The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.
Your telephone line might not be working.
A communication error might be interrupting the fax job.
A poor telephone connection might exist.
The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.
The printer is monitoring line condition while it is receiving or sending a fax job. If an
error occurs during the transmission and the ECM Mode setting is On, the printer
may request that the portion of the fax job to be resent. You should turn off ECM
Mode only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax job, and you are willing
to accept the errors in the transmission job. Turning off the setting might be useful
when you are trying to send a fax long distant or receive from long distant (example:
other countries etc.)
• Your telephone line might not be working.
Outgoing fax calls continue to be The printer automatically redials a fax number if the redial options are set to On.
dialed.
Successfully Send faxes job is not • The receiving fax machine might be off or might have an error condition, such as
been received at the other fax
being out of paper.
machine.
• A fax might be in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy number, other jobs
that are ahead of it are waiting to be sent, or the fax is set up for a delayed send.
Send faxes have a shading at the DADF (Flat-bed) scan size might be set to incorrect size.
trailing edge of each media.
291
Condition
Suggested solutions
The document stops in the
middle of faxing.
While faxing through DADF any documents smaller than 5.59 by 5.83 in. (142 by 148
mm) or larger than 8.5 by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm) might result into jam inside DADF.
See "Clearing Jams in the DADF".
Out of Memory.
You might be sending a fax that is too large, or the resolution might be too high.
Documents are not stored in the There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the display shows a
memory.
Memory Full message, delete any documents you no longer need from the memory
and then restore the document.
The document stops feeding in
the middle of faxing.
The maximum length of a page that you can load is 381 mm (15 inches). Faxing of a
longer page stops at 381 mm (15 inches).
Voice calls are not received by the • The fax line cord connection or configuration issue. See "Making Connections".
extension telephone or
• The receive mode or rings-to-answer settings might be incorrectly set. See "Setting up
answering machine that is
the Fax System".
connected to the same line
• The telephone answering machine or extension telephone might not be functioning
shared by the printer.
properly.
Copying Problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Copies are too light or too dark.
Use Contrast in Copy to darken or lighten the background of the copies.
Smears, lines, marks or spots
appear on copies.
• If defects are on the original, use Contrast in Copy to lighten the background of your
copies.
• If no defects are on the original, clean the document glass and underside of the
document cover. See "Cleaning the scanner".
Copy image is skewed.
• Ensure that the original is positioned correctly on document glass.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
Blank copies print out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the document glass or face up in the DADF
Image rubs off the copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the paper tray with paper from a new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the printer for the extended periods of
time.
Frequent copy paper jams
occurs.
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the paper tray. Replace the paper in the
tray with a fresh supply. If necessary, check/adjust the paper guides.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight. 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond paper is
recommended.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the printer after a paper
jam has been cleared.
292
Condition
Suggested solutions
Fewer copies from the toner
cartridge than expected prints
out.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids or heavy lines. For example, your originals
may be forms, newsletters, books or other documents that use more toner.
• The document cover may be left open while copies are being made.
Scanning Problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The scanner does not work.
• Ensure that you place the document to be scanned face down from the document
glass, or face up in the DADF.
• There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan.
Try the Prescan function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the USB cable is connected properly.
• Ensure that the USB cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a known good cable.
If necessary, replace the cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the application you want to use
to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
The unit scans very slowly.
• Check if the printer is printing received data. Scan the document after the current job
is completed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of
memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Message appears on your
computer screen:
• “Device can't be set to the
H/W mode you want.”
• “Port is being used by another
program.”
• “Port is Disabled.”
• “Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the
current job is completed, try
again.”
• “Invalid handle.”
• “Scanning has failed.”
• There may be a copying or printing job in progress. When the current job is complete,
try the job again.
• The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
• The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment is not set up properly.
• Ensure that the port is properly connected and the power is turned on. Then restart
your computer.
• Check that the USB cable is properly connected.
293
Global address problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
LDAP Maximum Query
Exceeded...
There exists limitation for number of results from the LDAP server for each LDAP
query.
The range for the number of results is 0~100.
Set the query between 1 and 100.
LDAP Server Authentication
Failed...
If a device has invalid credential (ID or PW), LDAP server will return authentication
failure message.
LDAP Query Failed...
If a user presses the STOP key during the search and no data was returned before
cancelling, the device will display this message.
LDAP No Such Attribute...
Result is depending on the query from the device.
If a user sees this error message, changing the query can avoid this situation.
LDAP Address Not Found...
This case is happening only when connection was successful and search result was
nothing.
LDAP Server Not Found...
It could be a wrong IP address setup or Server is not working correctly.
Administrator can suspect the physical condition, device (client) configuration and
server status.
In case of device configuration, administrator should check IP address or hostname or
port number.
LDAP Time Limit Exceeded...
It only happens when server is returning error code=8 which means "Server Time-out".
When server couldn't return all search result within the timeout.
This is abnormal case which is depending on the server side condition though.
A user can test server operation with other queries.
Common Windows Problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the StartUp Group, then
restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection Fault”,
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Exception OE”, “Spool32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
294
Condition
Suggested solutions
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred.”
messages appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine
finishes printing. If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been
completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
NOTE: Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac OS error messages.
Common Linux Problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The printer doesn’t print.
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open MFP configurator and switch
to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available printers.
Ensure that your printer is displayed on the list. If not, please, invoke Add new printer
wizard to set up your device.
• Check if the printer is started. Open Printers configuration and select your printer on the
printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains
“(stopped)” string, please, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the
printer should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems
in printing occurred. For instance, this could be an attempt to print document when MFP
port is claimed by a scanning application.
• Check if the MFP port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and
scanner) share the same I/O interface (MFP port), the situation of simultaneous access of
different “consumer” application to the same MFP port is possible. To avoid possible
conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. You should open MFP ports
configuration and select the port assigned to your printer. In the Selected port pane you
can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should wait
for completion of the current job or should press Release port button, if you are sure that
the present owner is not functioning properly.
• Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in
the command line parameter then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item.
“print”
295
Condition
Suggested solutions
The printer does not appear • Check if your printer is attached to your computer. Ensure that it is connected properly via
on the scanners list.
the USB port and is turned on.
• Check if the scanner driver for your printer is installed in your system. Open MFP
Configurator, switch to Scanners configuration, then press Drivers. Ensure that driver with
a name corresponding to your printer's name is listed in the window.
• Check if the MFP port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and
scanner) share the same I/O interface (MFP port), the situation of simultaneous access of
different “consumer” application to the same MFP port is possible. To avoid possible
conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. This can usually happen while starting
scan procedure, and appropriate message box appears.
• To identify the source of the problem, you should open MFP ports configuration and select
the port assigned to your scanner. MFP port's symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0
designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1 and so on. USB
ports start at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth
sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or should
press Release port button, if you are sure that the present port's owner is not functioning
properly.
The printer doesn’t scan.
• Check if a document is loaded into the printer.
• Check if your machine is connected to the computer. Ensure that if it is connected
properly if I/O error is reported while scanning.
• Check if MFP port is not busy. Since functional components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (MFP port), the situation of simultaneous access of different
"consumer" application to the same MFP port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only
one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other "consumer" will
encounter "device busy" response. This can usually happen while starting scan procedure,
and appropriate message box will be displayed.
To identify the source of the problem, you should open MFP ports configuration and select
the port assigned to your scanner. MFP port's symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0
designation displayed in the scanners' options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1 and so on. USB
ports start at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth
sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should wait for completion of the current job or should
press Release port button, if you are sure that the present port's owner is not functioning
properly.
I can’t print when I installed • Since both Linux Printer Package and MFP driver make a symbolic link to "lpr" printing
both Linux Print Package
command, which is commonly used on Unix clones, it is not recommended to use both
(LPP) and MFP driver on
package on the same machine.
the same machine
simultaneously.
296
Condition
Suggested solutions
Can’t scan via Gimp
Front-end.
• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane:Device dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you
should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page. For the detail
information, refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application.
If you wish to use other kind of scan application, refer to the Help for application.
I encounter error “Unable to Avoid changing print job parameters (via SLPR utility, for example) while a print job is in
open MFP port device file!” progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are
when printing a document. changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Linux MFP driver locks
MFP port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and
therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurred, try to release the
MFP port.
Common Macintosh Problems
Problems in the choose
r
Condition
Suggested solutions
The printer does not print a Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products:
document from Acrobat
Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem. Turn on Print As Image from the
Reader.
Acrobat printing options.
The document has printed, Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or higher.
but the print job has not
disappeared from the
spooler in Mac OS 10.3.2.
Some letters are not
displayed normally during
the cover page printing.
This problem is caused because Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover page
printing. English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally at the cover page.
When printing a document The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the one in Acrobat
in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader.
Reader 6.0 or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
NOTE: Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac OS error messages.
297
Troubleshooting PostScript (PS) Errors
NOTE: To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PS errors occur, open the Print Options window and
click the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section.
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
PostScript file cannot be
printed.
The PostScript option may not be Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version
installed.
is available for printing.
Limit Check Error
The print job may be too complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the
print quality settings.
Or, expand the memory capacity.
A PS error page prints.
Print job may not be PS.
Ensure that the print job is a PS job. Check to see
whether the software application expected a setup or PS
header file to be sent to the printer.
The optional tray 2 is not
selected in the driver.
The printer driver has not been
configured to recognize the
optional tray 2.
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device
Options tab, and set the Tray Options option to Tray 2.
298
Installing Accessories
Precautions When Installing Printer Accessories
Installing Printer Memory
Installing an Optional Tray 2
Installing Wireless Network interface card
Precautions When Installing Printer Accessories
Never remove the control board while the printer is plugged in.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power cord when
installing or removing ANY internal or external printer option.
The control board and internal printer memory are sensitive to static electricity. Before
installing or removing an internal printer memory, discharge static electricity from your body
by touching something metal on any device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk
around before finishing installation, discharge any static electricity once again.
Installing Printer Memory
Additional printer memory is provided on a Dual In-line Memory Module (DIMM).
Your printer has 256 MB of memory. Additional 256 MB can be installed. Do not remove
preinstalled memory. Just add one more DIMM in the DIMM socket.
NOTE: Your printer supports only Dell DIMMs. Order Dell DIMMs online at www.dell.com.
300
1
Power the printer off and unplug all cables from the printer.
2
Grasp the control board cover and open it.
3
Remove a new memory DIMM from its antistatic package.
4
Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on the slot at about
a 30-degree tilt. Ensure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit
each other.
5
Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a “click”.
NOTE: The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual DIMM
and its slot.
6
Replace the control board cover.
7
Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the printer on.
After installing the memory DIMM, printer drivers will automatically configure the
updated memory.
301
Installing an Optional Tray 2
You can increase the paper handling capacity of your printer by installing an optional tray 2.
This tray holds 250 sheets of paper.
302
1
Power the printer off and unplug all cables from the printer.
2
Remove the packing tape and the tape fastening the optional tray 2 cable from the
bottom of the optional tray 2.
3
Find the location of the paper option tray connector and alignment pins.
4
Place the printer over the tray, aligning the feet on the printer with the alignment pins in
the optional tray 2.
5
Connect the cable into the connector on the back of the printer.
6
Load paper in the optional tray 2. For information about loading paper in this tray, see
"Loading Paper".
7
Reconnect the power cord and cables and then power the printer on.
After installing the optional tray 2, printer drivers will automatically sense tray 2.
303
Installing Wireless Network interface card
The machine is equipped with a network interface which allows you to use your printer on a
network. You can also purchase a wireless network interface card to enable the use of the
printer in wireless network environments. For information about installing the network printer
server, see the network printer server user’s guide.
For information about installing the wireless network interface card and configuring the
network parameters, refer to Wireless Network Quick Install Guide.
304
Specifications
General Specifications
Scanner and Copier Specifications
Printer Specifications
Facsimile Specifications
Paper Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Description
DADF input capacity
Up to 50 sheets (20 lb, 75 g/m2)
DADF document size
Width: 5.6-8.5 in. (142-216 mm)
Length: 5.8-14 in. (148-356 mm)
Paper input capacity
Paper tray (tray 1 and optional tray 2): 250 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
MPF: plain paper 50 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb), special paper: 5 sheets 75
g/m2 (20 lb)
Paper output capacity
Output tray: 150 sheets (face down)
rear door: 1 sheet (face up)
Paper tray (tray 1 and optional tray 2): Plain paper (60-90 g/m2,
16-24 lb)
Paper type
MPF: Plain paper, Transparencies, Labels, Card, Post card (60-163
g/m2, 16-43 lb), Envelopes (75-90 g/m2, 20-24 lb)
Duplex printing: Plain paper (75-90 g/m2, 20-24 lb)
Consumables
1-piece toner cartridge system
Power requirements
110-127 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6.5A
220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3.5A
Power consumption
a
Printing: Less than 600 W
Copying: Less than 600 W
Standby mode: Less than 80W
Sleep mode: Less than 18 W
Acoustic
Printing from standard tray (simplex job): 52 dBA
Printing from optional tray 2 (simplex job): 56 dBA
Duplex printing: 52 dBA
Copy (simplex job): 54 dBA
Standby mode: Inaudible
Warm-up time
Less than 60 seconds
Operating conditions
Temperature: 50o F-89o F (10o C-32o C)
Humidity: 20%-80% RH
Display
306
4.3 inch Touch Screen Panel
Item
Description
b
Toner cartridge life
Dell Standard Capacity Toner Cartridge life: 3,000 pages
Dell High Capacity Toner Cartridge life: 10,000 pages
Printer dimension
(W x D x H)
18.3 x 17.5 x 18.1 in.
Random Access Memory
DDR2 SDRAM 256 MB(Basic) / 512 MB(Max)
Weight
Net: 20.2 Kg (including toner cartridge), 19.1 Kg (except toner
cartridge)
(465 x 445 x 460 mm)
Gross: 24.5 Kg (including consumables, accessories and package)
Package weight
Paper: 2.8 Kg
Plastic: 1.1 Kg
a Power consumption can very depend on the configuration of your machine.
b Toner yield based on printing page with ISO standard page coverage in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752 testing
methodology. Yields vary with usage and environmental conditions.
Scanner and Copier Specifications
Item
Description
Compatibility
TWAIN standard/WIA standard
Scanning method
DADF and Flat-bed
Color CCD (Charge Coupled Device) module
Scan Resolution
Optical: 600 x 600 dpi (from Platen, mono and color),
600 x 600 dpi interpolated (from DADF, mono and color)
Enhanced: 4,800 x 4800 dpi
Copy Resolution
600 x 600 dpi
Effective scanning length
document glass: 11.5 in. (293 mm)
DADF: 14 in. (352 mm)
Effective scanning width
8.2 in. (208 mm)
Color bit depth
24 bit
Mono bit depth
1 bit for Lineart
8 bit for Gray scale
307
Item
Description
Scan speed (Text mode)
document glass: 15 (lineart), 20 (gray), 30 (color) seconds
DADF: 15 (lineart), 20 (gray), 30 (color) seconds
a
First Copy Out Time (FCOT)
From Standby Mode:
• via DADF: As Quick as 15 seconds
• via Platen: As Quick as 8.5 seconds
From Sleep Mode:
• via Platen: As Quick as 35 seconds
Copy speed
SDMC (Single Document Multiple Copy): 35 cpm (copies per
minute for letter), 33 cpm for A4
MDMC (Multi-document Multiple Copy) at Text, Text/Photo,
Photo: 21 cpm (copies per minute for letter), 20 cpm for A4
MDSC (Multi-document Single Copy): 7 ipm (image per minute
for letter), 6 ipm for A4
MDMC at Photo mode: 4 cpm
Paper size
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, A5, A6, B5
Zoom rate
document glass, DADF: 25%-400%
Multiple copies
1-500 pages
Copy mode (=Original Type)
Text, Text&Photo, Photo
a FCOT is measured based on internal procedure.
308
Printer Specifications
Item
Description
Printing method
Laser Beam Printing
Printing speed (Simplex)
Letter: up to 35 ppm (pages per minute)
A4: up to 33 ppm
Printing speed (Duplex)
Letter: up to 21 ipm (images per minute)
A4: up to 20 ipm
Paper size
Paper tray (tray 1 and optional tray 2): Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio,
Folio, A5, A6, Executive, JIS B5, ISO B5
MPF: Letter, Legal, A4, Oficio, Folio, Executive, A5, A6 card, Post
Card 4x6, Envelope 10, Envelope COM-10, Envelope DL, Envelope
C5, Envelope C6, Envelope B5, JIS B5, ISO B5
* Min.: 3 x 5 in. (76 x 127 mm)
Max.: 8.5 x 14 in. (216 x 356 mm)
Duplex printing: Letter, A4, Legal, Oficio, Folio
Print resolution
Up to 1200 dpi effective output
Emulation
PCL6, PCL5e, PostScript Level3
Font Memory
512 KB
PC Interface
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Network Protocol
TCP/IPv4, IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, 9100, LPR, SNMP, HTTP, IPSec),
EtherTalk, Novell NetWare NDPS services via TCP/IP & IPP on 5.x,
6.x, DHCP, BOOTP, SLP, SSDP, Bonjour (Rendezvous), DDNS,
WINS, TCP (Port 2000), LPR (Port 515), Raw (Port 9100),
SNMPv1/2/3, HTTP, Telnet, SMTP (E-mail Notification)
Client & Network Operating
System
• Windows 2000, XP 64 bit (Home & Pro), XP 32 bit (Home & Pro),
Server 2003 & 2008, Vista 32bit / 64bit (Starter, Home Basic, Home
Premium, Ultimate, Enterprise & Business), Windows 7, Server
2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6
• Novell NetWare NDPS services via TCP/IP & IPP on 5.x, 6.x
• Bonjour discovery supported
• SAP R/3 v4.6C, 4.x and 3.x and later.
• Citrix MetaFrame; Windows Terminal Services
309
Item
Description
First Page Out Time (FPOT)
From Standby mode: Less than or equal to 8.5 seconds
From Sleep mode: Less than 24 seconds (Measured after less than
10 minutes in power save mode)
310
Facsimile Specifications
Item
Description
Compatibility
ITU-T Group 3
Applicable line
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind PABX
Data coding
MH/MR/MMR (ECM Mode) and JPEG/JBIG for color fax
transmission
Modem speed
33.6 Kbps
Transmission speed
Approx. 3 seconds/page
* Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data
with ECM compression using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.
Scanning speed
document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4, 2.5 seconds/LTR (at standard
fax resolution mode)
DADF: approx. 2.5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution
mode), 5 seconds/Letter (at fine fax resolution mode)
Multiple page scan speed
approx. 21 ppm/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode)
DADF: approx. 2.5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution
mode), 5 seconds/Letter (at fine fax resolution mode)
Maximum document length
document glass: 297 mm
DADF: 356 mm
Paper size
document glass: Letter, A4
DADF: Letter, A4, Legal
Resolution
Standard: 203 x 98 dpi
Fine: 203 x 196 dpi
Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi
Back-up Memory
4 MB (Approx. 200 pages at ITU-T #1 Chart)
Halftone
256 levels
311
Paper Specifications
Overview
Your printer accepts a variety of print materials, such as cut-sheet paper (including up to
100 percent recycled fiber content paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies and custom-size
paper. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain and moisture content, are important
factors affecting the printer’s performance and the output quality. Paper that does not meet
the guidelines outlined in this User’s Guide can cause the following problems:
•
Poor print quality
•
Increased paper jams
•
Premature wear on the printer
NOTE: Some paper may meet all of the guidelines in this guide and still not produce satisfactory
results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,
or other variables over which Dell has no control.
NOTE: Before purchasing large quantities of paper, ensure the paper meets the requirements
specified in this User’s Guide.
CAUTION: Using paper that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring
repairs. These repairs are not covered by the Dell warranty or service agreements.
312
Supported Sizes of Paper
Paper
Dimensionsa
Weight
Capacityb
Letter
8.5 x 11 in.
(216 x 279 mm)
A4
8.3 x 11.7 in.
(210 x 297 mm)
• 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20
lb) paper for the paper tray
(tray 1 and optional tray 2)
• 50 sheet of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb)
paper for the MPF
Executive
7.25 x 10.5 in.
(184 x 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 x 14 in.
(216 x 356 mm)
• 60-90 g/m2 bond
(16-24 lb) for the
paper tray
• 60-163 g/m2 bond
(16-43 lb) for the
MPF
• 75-90 g/m2 bond
(20-24 lb) for the
duplex printing
Oficio
8.5 x 13.5 in.
(216 x 343 mm)
Folio
8.5 x 13 in.
(216 x 330 mm)
JIS B5
7.16 x 10.11 in.
(182 x 257mm)
ISO B5
6.93 x 9.84 in.
(176 x 250mm)
A5
5.82 x 8.3in.
(148 x 210 mm)
60-163 g/m2
bond (16-32 lb)
5 sheets of paper for the MPF
Minimum size 3 x 5 in.
(custom)
(76 x 127 mm)
Maximum size 8.5 x 14 in.
(Legal)
(216 x 356 mm)
Labels
Same minimum and
138-146 g/m2
maximum paper sizes as
120-150 g/m2
listed above.
Cards
105-163 g/m2
Envelopes
75-90 g/m2
Transparency
a
b
The printer supports a wide range of media sizes.
Capacity may vary depending on print materials’ weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
NOTE: You may experience jams when using print materials with a length of less than 127 mm
(5 inches). For optimum performance, ensure that you are storing and handling the paper correctly.
Please refer to "Printer and Paper Storage Environment".
313
NOTE: You can use A4, Letter, Folio, Oficio, Legal-sized paper for duplex printing.
Guidelines for Using Paper
For the best result, use conventional 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. Ensure that the paper is of good
quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or
bent edges.
If you are unsure of what type of paper you are loading, such as bond or recycled paper, check
the label on the package.
The following problems may cause print quality deviations, jamming or even damage to the
printer:
Symptom
Problem with paper
Solution
Poor print quality or toner adhesion, Too moist, too rough, too
problems with feeding
smooth or embossed; faulty
paper lot
Try another kind of paper,
between 100-400 Sheffield,
4%-5% moisture content.
Dropout, jamming, curl
Stored improperly
Store paper flat in its
moisture-proof wrapping.
Increased gray background
shading/printer wear
Too heavy
Use lighter paper, use the rear
door.
Excessive curl problems with
feeding
Too moist, wrong grain
direction or short-grain
construction
• Use the rear door.
• Use long-grain paper.
Jamming, damage to printer
Cutouts or perforations
Do not use paper with cutouts
or perforations.
Problems with feeding
Ragged edges
Use good quality paper.
NOTE: Do not use letterhead paper printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in some
types of thermography.
NOTE: Do not use raised or embossed letterhead.
NOTE: The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Ensure that any colored paper
or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with this fusing temperature (180° C or 356° F for
0.1 second).
314
Paper Specifications
Category
Specifications
Acid Content
5.5 pH or lower
Caliper
0.094-0.18 mm (3.0-7.0 mils)
Curl in Ream
Flat within 0.02 in. (5 mm)
Cut Edge Conditions
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray.
Fusing Compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset or release hazardous emissions when
heated to 180° C (356° F) for 0.1 second.
Grain
Long Grain
Moisture Content
4%-6% by weight
Smoothness
100-400 Sheffield
Paper Output Capacity
Output Location
Capacity
output tray (Face Down)
150 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper
rear door (Face Up)
1 sheet of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper
Printer and Paper Storage Environment
Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
Ideally, the printer and paper storage environment should be at or near room temperature, and
not too dry or humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses moisture
rapidly.
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate,
while cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners remove
most of the humidity from a room. As paper is opened and used, it loses moisture, causing
streaks and smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can cause the humidity to increase in a
room. As paper is opened and used it absorbs any excess moisture, causing light print and
dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains moisture it can become distorted. This can cause paper
jams.
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be used in a short time (about 3
months). Paper stored for long periods may experience heat and moisture extremes, which can
cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to large supplies of paper.
315
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Opened
packages of paper have more potential for environment damage, especially if they are not
wrapped with a moisture-proof barrier.
The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum
performance. The required condition is 20° C to 24° C (68° F to 75° F), with a relative
humidity of 4 percent to 55percent. The following guidelines should be considered when
evaluating the paper’s storage environment:
316
•
Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.
•
The air should not be too dry or too humid.
•
The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof
wrapping. If the printer environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of
paper to be used during the day’s operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes.
Index
A
default setting, 140
number of pages, 132
problem, 292
quality, 133
reduced/enlarged copy, 134
special features, 134
time out, setting, 45
Address Book, use, 167
alarm sound, 184
Ans/Fax mode, receiving
mode, 186
auto fit, special copy, 136
automatic redialing, 192
D
B
booklet printing, 117
C
cartridge
installing, 29
ordering, 257
redistributing, 252
replacing, 254
cleaning
drum, 256
exterior, 248
interior, 248
scanner, 251
clone, special copy, 137
collation, special copy, 139
DADF (duplex automatic
document feeder),
loading, 129
date and time, setting, 43,
182
dayliging saving, setting, 44,
183
delayed fax, 201
DIMM, installing, 300
display language,
changing, 42
document
jam, clearing, 260
loading
document glass, 130
in DADF, 129
preparing, 128
component location, 20
document glass
cleaning, 251
copying
canceling, 131-132, 135-139
contrast, 133
driver, printer
installing, 57
uninstalling, 65
DRPD (Distinctive Ring
Pattern Detection) mode,
receiving mode, 186
drum, cleaning, 256
E
email
scanning/sending, 149
setting account, 160
error messages, 276
ethernet, connecting, 38
extension phone,
connecting, 34
F
Fax mode, receiving
mode, 186
fax system, setting
advanced, 208
basic, 185
faxing
automatically, 189
manually, 191
problem, 290
fit to page
copying, 136
printing, 115
forwarding faxes, 208
317
G
graphic properties,
printing, 107
group dial, faxing
dialing, 200
editing, 198
setting, 197
group number, email
assigning, 168
deleting, 169
editing, 169
H
help, 112
I
ID card, special copy, 138
Linux
installing driver, 225
printer properties, 237
printing, 238
uninstalling driver, 231
loading, document
in scanner glass, 131
loading, paper
in MPF (multi purpose
feeder), 90
in paper tray, 31
M
Macintosh
installing driver, 214-215
printing, 218
scanning, 222
uninstalling driver, 215
ID, setting, 182
memory
installing, 300
installing
memory, 300
toner cartridge, 29
N
IP, setting, 59
network printer, setting, 172
J
O
jam, clearing
document, 260
paper, 264
operator panel, 22
option, installing
memory, 300
ordering supplies, 257
L
layout properties,
printing, 104
31 8
orientation, printing in
Windows, 104
output location, selecting, 87
overlay, using, 122
P
paper jam, clearing, 264
paper loading
in MPF (multi purpose
feeder), 90
in paper tray, 31
paper size, setting
paper tray, 93
print, 106
paper source, set, 239
paper source, setting, 106
paper type, setting
paper tray, 93
print, 106
power save mode, 42
print resolution, 239
printer driver
installing, 57
uninstalling, 65
printer NVRAM
clearing, 246
printer properties
Linux, 238
printer properties,
setting, 103
printing
booklets, 117
canceling, 102
fitting to a selected paper
size, 115
from Linux, 238
from Windows, 100
multiple pages on one
sheet, 113
posters, 116
problem, 283
using overlays, 122
watermarks, 119
priority fax, 202
problem, solve
Windows, 294
problem, solving
copying, 292
error messages, 276
faxing, 290
paper feeding, 282
printing, 283
printing quality, 285
PS errors, 298
scanning, 293
R
rear output, 88
reduced/enlarged
copying, 134
replacing toner cartridge, 254
reports, printing, 206
resolution
printing, 239
scanner lamp power save
mode, 45
scanner, cleaning, 251
scanning
from operator panel, 148
from WIA, 154
problem, 293
to network computer, 146
to USB memory, 155
setup
to email, 160
software
installing, 57
uninstalling, 65
V
volume, adjust
ringer, 184
W
watermarks, printing, 119
WIA, scanning, 154
speaker sound, 184
speed dial, fax
dialing, 196
storing, 195
supplies, ordering, 257
T
tel line, connecting, 34
Tel mode, receiving
mode, 186
toll save mode, 184
ringer sound, 184
toner cartridge
ordering, 257
redistributing, 252
replacing, 254
S
U
scan manager
scanning, 146
USB cable, connecting, 37
resolution, printing, 108
USB memory
managing, 158
scanning, 156
319